JP5506859B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, includes a variable display means having a variable display unit for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can be individually identified and for displaying and displaying a display result, When the display result of the identification information of the variable display means becomes a predetermined specific display result, it is controlled to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is determined based on the fact that a special condition is established. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state in which the probability that the specific display result is obtained after the specific game state is ended is higher than a normal probability state.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, variable display is performed by updating or scrolling predetermined identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) on a display device such as a liquid crystal display (hereinafter referred to as LCD). There are a number of games that have been enhanced by a so-called variable display game that determines whether or not to give a predetermined game value based on the display result (variable display result).

  As an example of the variable display game, the variable display of the display symbol is completely stopped based on the detection of the game ball passing through the starting winning opening (the variable display start condition is satisfied). In some cases, the “hit” is a case where the stop symbol mode (variable display result) at that time is a predetermined specific display result. In this variable display game, when a “hit” is made, a special electric combination called a big prize opening or an attacker is opened, and a state in which a game ball can be won extremely easily is provided to a player for a certain period of time. . Such a state is referred to as a “specific game state” or a “hit game state”. In addition, the predetermined variable display state that may be a “big hit” in the variable display game is “reach” (also referred to as “reach state”), and the variable display state of the display symbol is “reach” There are known gaming machines that perform various production operations.

  In the pachinko gaming machine described above, when the display result of the variable display is a special display result determined in advance among the specific display results, there is a “probable big hit”. In the variable display game, if the probability game is a big hit, after the end of the specific game state, it will be a special game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a probability change game state (high probability state) in which the probability that the display result will be a big hit is higher than the normal state Some control.

  As such a gaming machine, the variable display result was “suddenly promising big hit” which is one of the probable big hits, and hits (predetermined gaming state) in which the big winning opening or the state of opening the attacker is the same. Sometimes, a gaming machine that shifts to a mission mode (common effect mode) that presents a predetermined condition (mission) to a player has also been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, when the mode is shifted to the mission mode, the mode for opening the big prize opening or the attacker is the same, so it is not possible to confirm whether or not the game is controlled to the probability variation game state. The player can be expected to be in a state.

JP 2007-98047 A

  However, in the technique described in Patent Document 1, when the game is shifted to the common performance mode after being controlled to the predetermined gaming state, no further performance or notification is performed even if the common performance mode is continued. The common production mode has no meaning to continue, and the interest of the game has been reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the interest of a gaming machine that shifts to a common performance mode when controlled to a predetermined gaming state .

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present application variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified, and derives a display result. A display result of the identification information of a variable display means (for example, the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. ) having a variable display unit for displaying a predetermined display result ( For example, when a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol that becomes a big hit combination is reached, control is performed to a specific gaming state (for example, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and a special condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 performs stepping) Based on the fact that the jackpot type of “probability change” or “surprise” is determined in the process of S249), the game state becomes the specific display result after the specific game state is ended. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probable variation state) having a probability higher than a normal probability state (for example, a normal state), and is advantageous to the player (for example, an enlarged opening) State) and a second state (for example, a normally open state or a closed upper body) that is disadvantageous to the player, and a special variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7), and the specific gaming state includes the special variable winning device. A first specific gaming state (for example, 15 round big hit gaming state) that changes the device from the second state to the first state for a first period (for example, 15 rounds), and a special variable winning device that is shorter than the first period. Including at least a second specific gaming state (for example, two round big hit gaming state) that changes from the second state to the first state for two periods (for example, two rounds), and the variable When the display result of the identification information of the display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a small hit symbol or a final stop symbol that becomes a chance of chance of hitting), the special variable winning device is specified as the second specified A small hit gaming state control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S118 to S120) for controlling to a small hit gaming state to be changed in the same manner as the gaming state, and whether to control to the specific gaming state , or controlled to the specific game state shifts have, previously determined that whether or not to establish the pre-SL special conditions, and the Koatari gaming mode the identification information of the display results whether control to is derived displayed Based on the determination by the prior determination means (for example, the portion where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S238 to S241 and steps S245 to 249) and the prior determination means, State control means for controlling the high probability state after the second specific gaming state is ended, while maintaining the probability state before the small hit gaming state is ended after the small hit gaming state is ended (for example, the CPU 103 performs step). S345) and the common probability state regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the normal probability state based on the control of the second specific gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Common effect mode control means (for example, the portion for which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S747) that controls to the common effect mode in which the effect can be executed (for example, mode A, mode B, and mode C). Based on the fact that the effect mode control means is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the common effect mode is controlled, and the common effect mode There are the predetermination means if the conditions for executing the established is established by the determines to control the specific game state, special effect execution means for executing the special effect (e.g. presentation control CPU120 steps S781, S782 and S783 Yes and saw including a portion) to determine the presence and special effect pattern of the execution of the special effect in step S791 when it is determined by the special effect execution means, said special during satisfied the execution condition The variable display means can identify each based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A) in the starting area without performing the production. First variable display means (for example, a first special symbol display device) that variably displays a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special figure) and derives and displays a display result. 4A) and a plurality of types of second identifications, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B) among the starting areas. Second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B) for variably displaying information (for example, the second special figure) and deriving and displaying the display result, the first variable display means and the second variable display means; When both the first identification information and the second identification information can be variably displayed, priority control means (for example, the CPU 103) prioritizes execution of the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means. The determination unit is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area or the game medium has passed through the second start area. Determining whether to control to the specific gaming state, which to control to the specific gaming state, or whether to satisfy the special condition, and when the game medium passes through the first starting area; The determination of which specific gaming state is to be controlled at a different rate depending on when the game medium passes through the second starting area (for example, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type with different allocation of the decision value for the big hit type) The jackpot type is determined based on the table 131).
In claim 1, when a specific game state during common effect mode when the transition to the common effect mode based on controlled at Koatari gaming state, since special effect is executed, the player However, it will be more focused on the production, and the fun of the game will be improved. In addition, it is possible to change the expectation of which specific game state is controlled depending on which variable display means executes variable display, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) The gaming machine according to claim 2 is a variable display having a variable display unit that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols, decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified and derives and displays a display result. The display result of the identification information of the means (for example, the image display device 5, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. ) becomes a predetermined specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol or a big hit combination) When the final stop symbol or the like is reached, control is made to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and the special condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 103 performs “probable change” in the process of step S249). Or the probability that the specific display result is obtained after the specific game state has ended is determined as a normal probability state (e.g. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a higher probability state (for example, a probable variation state) than the first state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, an expanded open state) and disadvantageous for the player A special variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes to a second state (for example, a normally open state or a closed upper body), and the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device is moved to a first period (for example, 15). Round) a first specific gaming state (for example, 15 round big hit gaming state) that changes from the second state to the first state, and a second period (for example, 2 rounds) of the special variable winning device that is shorter than the first period. A second specific gaming state (for example, a “surprise” two-round big hit gaming state) to be changed from the second state to the first state, and the special variable prize-winning device for the second period in the second state. A third specific game state is changed to et the first state (e.g., 2 rounds jackpot gaming state of "sudden Normal"), includes at least a, whether to control the specific game state, have the specific game state shifts controlled to either pre-determining means (e.g. CPU103 to decide whether or not to establish a及beauty before Symbol special conditions before the display result of the identification information is derived displayed step S238～S239, step S245~249 A portion for executing the process) and the high probability state after the second specific gaming state is ended based on the determination by the pre-determining means, while the normal state after the third specific gaming state is ended State control means for controlling the probability state (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S345), the second specific gaming state or the third specific gaming card Common effect mode control means (for example, for effect control) for controlling to a common effect mode capable of executing a common effect regardless of whether the state is in the high probability state or the normal probability state. CPU 120 executes the process of step S747), and the common effect mode control means has controlled to the common effect mode based on the control to the third specific gaming state, and the common effect In the mode, the special effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for executing the effect control executes step S781 ) when the execution condition that is satisfied by the determination that the prior determination means controls to the specific gaming state is satisfied. When it is determined Yes in S782 and S783, whether or not the special effect is executed and the special effect pattern in step S791. Look including a portion) of determining, the special effect execution means, said at unsatisfied execution condition without performing the special effect, the variable display means, the first start-up region in the starting region (e.g. ordinary winning ball device Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start winning opening formed by 6A), a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, the first special figure) that can be individually identified are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. The game medium has passed through the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) and the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B) in the start area. A second variable display means (for example, a second special symbol display device 4B) for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, the second special figure) that can be identified based on each other and for deriving and displaying a display result; First variable display means and Priority control that prioritizes execution of variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means when both of the second variable display means can execute variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information. Means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the determination in step S234), and the predetermining means indicates that the game medium has passed through the first start area, or the second start area as a game medium. And whether to control to the specific gaming state, which to control to the specific gaming state, or whether to satisfy the special condition, and to play the first start area The specific game state is determined to be controlled at a different rate between when the medium passes and when the game medium passes through the second start area (for example, the CPU 103 determines the big hit type The jackpot type is determined on the basis of the jackpot type determination table 131 in which the allocation of the determined value for another is different).
In claim 2, when a specific game state during common effect mode when migrated to the common effect mode based on which is adjusted to the third specific game state, since special effect is executed, the game The person who pays attention to the production will improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to change the expectation of which specific game state is controlled depending on which variable display means executes variable display, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The variable display means includes a plurality of first types that can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A) in the starting area. First variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) for variably displaying the identification information (for example, the first special figure) and deriving and displaying the display result, and a second start area (for example, a normal variable prize for example) among the start areas Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting prize opening formed by the ball device 6B, a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, the second special figure), each of which can be identified, are variably displayed and a display result is derived. Second variable display means for displaying (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B), wherein the predetermining means indicates that a game medium has passed through the first start area or a game in the second start area. Based on media passing Whether to control to the specific gaming state, whether to use the specific gaming state when controlling to the specific gaming state, whether to establish the special condition when controlling to the specific gaming state, And determining whether or not to control to the small hit gaming state, the small medium at a different rate between when the game medium passes through the first start area and when the game medium passes through the second start area. The decision to control to the winning game state is made (for example, the CPU 103 is variable based on the first special figure display result determination table 130A or the second special figure display result determination table 130B in which the allocation of the determination value for “small hit” is different. The display result may be determined).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the game depending on which variable display means the variable display is executed, and it is possible to vary the proportion of transition to the common performance mode, The fun of gaming is improved.

(4) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (3),
The variable display means includes a plurality of first types that can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A) in the starting area. First variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A) for variably displaying the identification information (for example, the first special figure) and deriving and displaying the display result, and a second start area (for example, a normal variable prize for example) among the start areas Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting prize opening formed by the ball device 6B, a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, the second special figure), each of which can be identified, are variably displayed and a display result is derived. When both the second variable display means for displaying (for example, the second special symbol display device 4B), the first variable display means, and the second variable display means are capable of variable display, the second variable display means includes the second variable display means. 2. Variable identification information Priority control means for giving priority to the display (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the determination of step S234), and the pre-determining means indicates that the game medium has passed through the first start area, or the first (2) Whether to control to the specific gaming state based on the passing of the game medium through the starting area, and which specific gaming state to control when controlling to the specific gaming state, is controlled to the specific gaming state It is sometimes determined whether or not the special condition is satisfied, and when the game medium passes through the first start area and when the game medium passes through the second start area, Decide whether to enter the specific gaming state (for example, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination table 131 in which the allocation of the decision value for the jackpot type is different) That) may be.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the expectation level of which specific game state is controlled depending on which variable display means executes variable display, and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
The common effect mode control means is any of a plurality of common effect modes including at least a first common effect mode (for example, mode A) and a second common effect mode (for example, mode B) different from the first common effect mode. The special effect execution means controls at least the first common effect mode (for example, a special effect corresponding to mode A as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65), and A special effect corresponding to the second common effect mode (for example, a special effect corresponding to mode B as shown in FIG. 66) may be executable.
According to such a configuration, since a special effect corresponding to each common effect mode can be executed, the range of effects is widened, and the interest of the game is improved.

(6) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (5),
The special effect execution means includes a second special effect (for example, FIG. 65) different from the first special effect (for example, a special effect corresponding to the special effect pattern of the special effect A1 as shown in FIG. 64) and the first special effect. The special effect corresponding to the special effect pattern of the special effect A2 as shown in FIG. 6 can be executed, and depending on whether or not the pre-determining means has decided to establish the special condition, 1 The special effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a special effect in the process of step S791 based on the special effect determination tables 200A to 200C in which the determined values are assigned to the special effect patterns depending on the type of jackpot. The special effect pattern may be determined).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not it is easy to shift to a high probability state depending on which special effect is executed, so the player comes to pay more attention to the effect, The fun of gaming is improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the quasi-continuous chance eyes and the sudden chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of a main board | substrate. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the table selection setting of the variation pattern classification determination table for jackpots. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for small hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation pattern classification determination table for non-reach. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a loss fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an open pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted by the side of an effect control board. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a left-right output determination table. It is a figure which shows the non-reach combination which does not become a final stop symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a promotion effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a slip pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the temporary stop symbol in a pseudo | simulation continuous change. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a button production execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a control pattern table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the data holding area for production control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big prize opening opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit release pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during small hit release. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a slip / pseudo-continuous setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a change promotion effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a mode effect setting process. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of special production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation during the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the special effect in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the special effect in the variable display of a decoration design. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation | movement of the special effect in the variable display of a decoration design. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the correspondence of the combination of an open pattern and presentation mode, and a probability variation latency. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the correspondence of the combination of the open pattern and effect mode in a modification, and a probability variation latency. It is a figure which shows the structural examples, such as various control boards in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed is variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, a decorative design or color design that is a plurality of types of identification information (decoration identification information) that can be identified in a decorative design display area or a color design display area that is a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three. (Also referred to as “4th symbol”) is variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs and color designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image indicating a person or an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure). In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively.

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, scroll display is performed from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol number, and the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed. Subsequently, a decorative symbol having the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B are arranged. When the variation of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol (for example, update of the display color) is started in the “left” color symbol display area 5A. Is done. On the other hand, when the variation of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started as the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is started in the “right” color symbol display area 5B. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the variation of the color symbol is finished, and the fixed color symbol that becomes the variable display result of the color symbol is stopped and displayed.

  The color symbols variably displayed in the “left” and “right” color symbol display areas 5A and 5B include, for example, four types of symbols (for example, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “blue”, etc.) As long as it is included. Each of the color symbols is assigned a corresponding symbol number. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “4” are assigned to the color symbols “yellow”, “green”, “red”, and “blue”, respectively.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the holding of the variable display is based on the fact that the game ball has entered (starting winning) the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B. The start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative design is established, but the variable display game based on the start condition established previously is being executed. This occurs when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  As an example, the start winning storage display area 5H is provided with a plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed from left to right in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning. Yes. When the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the The first reserved memory is displayed by changing one of the display parts that are displayed (transparent color) (for example, the leftmost display part among the non-displayed display parts) to blue display. Further, when a special ball game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the game ball entering the second start winning opening, it is normally not The second reserved memory is displayed by changing one of the displayed display parts to a red display. Thereafter, when one of the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure and the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is established, for example, By removing the display at the leftmost display part, the reserved memory (first reserved memory or second reserved memory) is reduced, and the display at each display part is moved to the left one by one. At this time, one of the display parts that have changed to blue display or red display (for example, the display part at the right end of the display part whose display color has changed) returns to non-display. In this embodiment, when both the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are present (when the number of the first reserved memory and the number of the second reserved memories are not 0), the second reserved memory is given priority. And digest. In other words, when both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the satisfaction of the second start condition is prioritized, and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed first. Therefore, when there is a first reserved memory and a second reserved memory, a red display corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed on the left side of the blue display corresponding to the first reserved memory. If the second start condition is satisfied when there is already a blue display, the red display increases on the left side of the blue display, and the blue display shifts to the right. Note that the hold storage display in the start winning storage display area 5H is not limited to this. For example, the display area corresponding to the first hold storage and the display area corresponding to the second hold storage are separately (for example, the image display device 5). In the lower left and lower right). Further, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory may be displayed so as to be identifiable.

  Here, in this embodiment, when performing the hold memory display, the number of special figure hold memories based on the establishment of the variable display game start condition can be specified, but the start condition is the first start condition. When it is not possible to specify whether the condition is the second start condition, the display mode of the special figure reserved memory number is changed to a predetermined display mode, for example, by changing the number of display parts corresponding to the special figure reserved memory number to gray. change.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the number of special figure hold memories in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold indicator LED 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A so as to be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has, for example, a number (for example, four) of LEDs corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. It is comprised including.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilted position by a predetermined solenoid for a normal electric accessory (normally A second start winning opening is provided. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball is unlikely to enter the second start winning opening. It becomes. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid is turned on, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening. It becomes a state. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first reserved memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). ) If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and if the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a predetermined large winning opening solenoid, and forms a large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the large winning opening door solenoid is in the ON state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening. A game ball that has entered a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately illuminating decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. For example, an operation button 30 that can be operated by the player by a pressing operation or the like is provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate.

  In the normal game with the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per normal symbol”, the expansion / release control is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted, for a predetermined time. When elapses, normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  The special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is caused by the fact that the game ball that has entered the first starting winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is satisfied, the operation is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game, the big hit gaming state, or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, a game ball that has entered the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied, the second start condition is started based on the fact that the second special condition game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, after the predetermined time has elapsed, a fixed special symbol that becomes a variable symbol variable display result is displayed. Stop display (derived display). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result, and it becomes “lost” if a special symbol other than the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to a small hit game state (predetermined game state) different from the big hit game state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, numbers indicating “1”, “3”, and “7” are jackpot symbols, numbers indicating “5” are jackpot symbols, and “−” is indicated. The symbol is a lost pattern. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  In this embodiment, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” are 15 round jackpot symbols, A special symbol indicating the number “1” is a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific gaming state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the open / close plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated. A round is performed that changes to a first state that is advantageous to the user. In this way, the open / close plate that opened the grand prize opening during the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closed the grand prize opening to play the special variable prize ball device 7 as a game. Change to the second state, which is disadvantageous to the person, and finish one round. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15 round big hit state, 15 balls are obtained each time a game ball wins a big winning opening. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The period for changing to the first state that is advantageous to the player (the period in which the big prize opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is a second period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round, the predetermined winning port serving as the big winning port is changed from the closed state to the open state. Thus, the second state that is disadvantageous for the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the state may be returned to the second state after a predetermined period (first period or second period) has elapsed. In such a two-round big hit state, 15 game balls are obtained if a game ball wins the big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (1 second), which is very short. . Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a game is not substantially obtained. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, the special symbol variation time (special diagram variation time) in the special figure game is controlled to be a short time state as compared with the normal state. Here, the normal state is a normal gaming state as a gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a probability variation state, and a short-time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is usually a big bonus It is called a symbol (also called “non-probable big hit symbol”). Further, the fact that the 15-round non-probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “15R normal big hit” (also referred to as “15R non-probable big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the state is over, as one of the special game states different from the short-time state, for example, the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the advantage of increasing the possibility that the game ball enters the second start winning opening When the opening control is performed (shifted to the high base), the probability variation state (high probability high base state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15 round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. In addition, when the 2nd round big hit state ends after the special symbol showing the number “1” which becomes the 2nd round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, it is in the high base state As one of the special game states, the advantageous release control is continuously performed, and the probability variation state (high probability high base state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed is controlled. On the other hand, if the 2nd round jackpot state ends based on the fact that the special symbol showing the number “1”, which is the 2nd round jackpot symbol, has been stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, Then, the control is performed to the probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which the advantageous release control is not performed and the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  In the probability variation state and the short time state after the probability variation big hit, the control for making the variation time (ordinary variation time) of the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol game by the ordinary symbol display device 20 shorter than in the normal state, and each ordinary diagram game And the control to improve the probability that the variable symbol display result is “per standard” than in the normal state, and the variable variable winning ball device 6B is movable based on the fact that the variable display result is “per standard”. Make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening, such as a control for making the tilt control time for performing the tilt control of the wing pieces longer than in the normal state, and a control for increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening 14 in the probability changing state or the short time state is advantageous to the player, and is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. .

  After the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state different from the big hit game state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, a variable winning operation for changing the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is performed as in the two round big hit state. That is, in the small hit game state, for example, the operation of opening the large winning opening over the second period by the opening / closing plate provided in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is repeatedly executed until the second number of times is reached. In the small hit gaming state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the period in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in which the big prize opening is in the open state is the second number. It may be controlled so that at least one of them is performed. After the small hit game state ends, the game state and the base are not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. That is, the probability state immediately before the control to the small hit gaming state is continued without being changed during the control to the small hit gaming state or after the control to the small hit gaming state is completed. A game state in which the big winning opening is opened in the same way as in the 2-round big hit state, but the control to the probability change state is not executed is also referred to as a predetermined game state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the big winning opening is opened by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and the tilting time of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure” The second start condition is easily established by increasing the possibility that the game ball will enter the second start winning opening, such as control for making the time longer than that in the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to in the normal state. Thus, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. The control to be performed may be different between the probability variation state and the time-short state, or the combination of the controls to be performed (which may or may not include the same control) may be different.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, variable display of decorative symbols is performed in response to variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5, each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5 </ b> L is based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. At 5C and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started, and, for example, the fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of the decorative symbols in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle” are stopped and displayed (derived display). Note that the procedure for stopping and displaying the confirmed decorative symbols is not limited to the procedure for stopping and displaying the decorative symbols in the predetermined order in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, there may be included one that stops and displays a decorative symbol that becomes a confirmed decorative symbol simultaneously.

  In the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, The decorative display variable display state may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is changing, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. This is a display state that changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the combination. Corresponding to the reach state, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the display mode of the background image is changed. Or change the variation of the decorative pattern. Such a change in the display mode of the character image, the display mode of the background image, and the change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of decorative symbols may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit” In some cases, a variable display effect for notifying the player by a variable display mode of a decorative design or the like may be executed. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-continuous” are set to be executable.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying a decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, either “left” decorative symbol display area 5L or “right” decorative symbol display area 5R or both), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed. Here, the temporary stop display is the stop of the decorative symbol that is performed before the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (final stop display) because the variation time determined for each of a plurality of types of variation patterns described later has elapsed. Refers to the display. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, it is stopped and displayed to the player by, for example, performing fluctuation display and changing the decorative symbol immediately after stopping for a short time. It is only necessary to notify that the decorative pattern is not fixed. Alternatively, in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be re-fluctuated after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the decorative design that has been stopped is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbols are based on the fact that one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are changed in all of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, The effect display for changing the decorative design again (pseudo continuous change) at 5C and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four times). As an example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, the pseudo ream chances GC1 to GC1 shown in FIG. 3A are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The decorative symbols constituting any of the GC8s are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed (stopped display or temporary stop display) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 may be determined in advance as a combination of decorative symbols included in the special combination.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, or when the reach effect is not executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol showing the number “3”, which is a normal big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol that becomes a 15-round big hit symbol as a final special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. Here, the fixed decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose design numbers are even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” constituting the normal jackpot combination are referred to as normal symbols (also referred to as “non-probable variation symbols”). In response to the fixed special symbol in the special figure game becoming the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the variable symbol display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the normal jackpot combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a “normal” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) when the variable display result is “big hit”. In this way, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the “normal” variable display mode, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the short time state or the normal state. become.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. In response to the situation, a reach effect similar to the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed, or a reach effect different from the case where the jackpot type is “normal” is executed. Thereafter, a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the probable big jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the display result is “big hit”. In addition, when the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the fixed ornament symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol. . In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, if the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. If the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a probable big hit symbol, after the fixed ornament symbol that is normally a big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is played at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state The period from the end of one round in the state until the start of the next round, the period from the end of the last round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next variable display game, or the jackpot For example, during the first variable display game after the end of the gaming state, an effect operation for notifying that the state is controlled to the probability changing state may be performed.

  When a special symbol indicating the number “1” that is a two-round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, for example, FIG. As shown in (B), any of a combination of a plurality of types of determined decorative symbols that are predetermined as the chances of success TC1 to TC4 may be displayed in a stopped manner. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a confirmed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. In this way, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game becoming a special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, various decorative decorative variable display modes in which various confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. Is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “sudden probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the re-drawing effect, the decorative symbols that are usually the big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed on the effective lines of the decorative symbol display portions 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” on the image display device 5. Later, for example, the decorative pattern display units 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are changed again in a state where the same decorative pattern is aligned, and the decorative pattern that is a probable big hit combination, Any of the decorative symbols that become a big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed corresponding to the fact that the big hit type is “normal”, as the re-lottery effect, after the decorative pattern displayed temporarily stopped is re-varied, The change promotion promotion effect is performed to derive and display the determined decorative design. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, the re-lottery effect is re-variable after the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is re-variable. A changing promotion success effect that stops and displays a fixed decorative symbol that is a combination may be executed, or a changing promotion failure effect may be executed.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the variable display result is displayed in the period from when the variable display result is stopped until the end of the 15 round big hit state. A jackpot promotion effect may be executed as a notification effect on whether or not to control. Here, the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed may be a period before the start of the first round in the 15 round big hit state after the variable display result is stopped and displayed, or the 15 round big hit state May be a period during which any one of the rounds is being executed, or may be a period from the end of any round to the start of the next round in the 15 round big hit state, or 15 rounds. A period from the end of the last round in the big hit state to the start of the next variable display game may be used. Alternatively, an effect operation corresponding to the promotion effect during the big hit may be performed during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or decorative design after the end of the 15th round big hit state. The jackpot promotion effect executed after the final round in the 15 round jackpot state is sometimes referred to as “ending promotion effect” in particular. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, if a definite decorative symbol that is a promising big hit combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, the promotion effect during the big hit is given. It should just be prevented from being executed.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is a jackpot promotion promotion effect that informs that there is a promotion that the gaming state becomes a probable change state even though the confirmed decorative pattern is a normal jackpot combination, and that there is no promotion that becomes a probable change state There is a promotion promotion failure during the jackpot to be notified. As an example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the normal symbol or the probability variation symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result. At this time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect, while the probable change symbol may be stopped and displayed as the effect display result in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. As another example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the effect image indicating the roulette game is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the ball thrown into the rotating roulette entered the “even number” in the jackpot promotion failure production and displayed the effect image “Sorry!”, While the jackpot promotion promotion production was thrown into the rotating roulette. The ball enters “odd number” and the effect image “probability!” Is displayed. When the big hit type is “probable change”, but the fixed decorative symbol of the normal big hit combination is stopped and displayed, the promotion will be in the probable change state by executing the promotion effect during the big hit before the big hit game state is finished. What is necessary is just to alert | report that there exists. When the jackpot type is “normal”, it is only necessary not to execute the success promotion effect during the jackpot and not to notify that there is a promotion that is in a probable change state until the jackpot gaming state ends. .

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is provided with a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes in the image display device 5 and the like. In this embodiment, six effect modes, mode A, mode B, mode C, mode J, mode K, and mode N, are provided. These effect modes are switched according to the current effect mode, the jackpot type, or the like when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, or when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. In addition, in order to enhance a production effect, production modes other than these may be provided.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”, the mode K effect mode is set after the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) ends. That is, the mode is in a certain change state during the mode K effect mode. In the effect mode of mode K, for example, an effect image notifying that the game state is a probability-changing game state such as “probability changing” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and / or the background on the display screen of the image display device 5 It may be possible for the player to recognize that the display state of the image or the decorative pattern is different from the display mode in the other effect modes.

  The mode K may be a specific effect mode (for example, a battle mode) in which effects with the same background or character image are continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. More specifically, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the teammate character performs a battle effect to fight the enemy character, and when the jackpot type is “probability”, the teammate character performs the effect of winning the enemy character. When the battle mode is continued and the other jackpot type is used, the battle mode may be terminated by performing an effect that the ally character loses to the enemy character. In such a battle mode, the decorative display variable display mode may be “reach” only when the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Furthermore, the ratio that the jackpot type is “probable change” may be different depending on which combination of the decorative symbols is used when the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal”, the mode J effect mode is entered after the big hit gaming state (15 rounds big hit state) ends. If the variable display result is not “big hit” in the mode J effect mode and the time-short state is completed, the mode N effect mode is set. In other words, the mode J is short during the mode J production mode. In the effect mode of mode J, for example, an effect image notifying that the time is in a short state such as “short time” is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 and / or a background image on the display screen of the image display device 5 Alternatively, the player may be able to recognize the short-time state by making the display mode of the decorative pattern different from the display mode in the other effect modes.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, the mode A, mode B, or mode C effect mode is entered after the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) ends. When the variable display result is “small hit”, the mode A, mode B, or mode C effect mode is set after the end of the small hit gaming state. As described above, during the mode A, mode B, or mode C effect mode, there is a case where the probability change state is based on the big hit type of “surprise accuracy” or the normal state based on the variable display result of “small hit”. , It can be either a short-time state or a probabilistic state.

  When the mode is one of the production modes of mode A, mode B, and mode C, for example, it is common between when the game is controlled to a predetermined special game state in which probability change control such as a probability change state is performed and when it is not controlled. It is impossible to specify whether or not the effect is executed and the game state is controlled. Here, the common effects include the display operation of the background, the character to be displayed, and the shape of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the movable member. It means that the production operation such as the movement operation is the same production mode regardless of the gaming state. An effect mode in which a common effect is executed, such as mode A, mode B, and mode C, is also referred to as a common effect mode.

  In this embodiment, during the variable display when the variable display result is other than “losing” in the common effect mode when the variable display result is “small hit” and the mode is changed to the common effect mode. Then, a special effect such as displaying a character image on the image display device 5 is executed. By executing such a special effect, the player's attention to the effect increases and the interest of the game is improved. As this special effect, a plurality of effect patterns are prepared. For example, special effects of different effect patterns are executed corresponding to the respective common effect modes (mode A, mode B, mode C).

  In addition, even if the plurality of effect modes include an effect mode that can recognize that the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the special gaming state, such as the mode J or mode K, for example. Alternatively, for example, only the effect modes in which it cannot be specified that the game state is controlled to the special game state, such as the effect modes of mode A, mode B, and mode C, may be included. Further, in this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”. After the end of the small hit game state in a certain case, the game state is shifted to a special play state that cannot be specified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a transition may be made after the end of the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probability change” or “normal” (ie Mode J or mode K may be a production mode in which a common production is executed), or a variable display based on a specific variable display pattern (for example, a reach-losing variable display pattern in which a specific reach production is executed) is executed. As a result, the fact that the gaming state is controlled to the special gaming state may be shifted to a production mode in which it cannot be specified.

  When the game state is not the mode A, mode B, or mode C but the game state is the normal state, the mode N is the effect mode corresponding to the normal state.

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 is mounted with, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical parts such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22 </ b> A and 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23 is connected to the main board 11. The gate switch 21, the first and second starter switches 22A and 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. If it is. Further, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, and the like.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, a prior determination result indicating whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set corresponding to the big hit type determination result of whether the decorative symbol variable display mode in the case of “big hit” is “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise accuracy”. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command that indicates a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result that the decorative symbol variable display mode is “surprise” when the variable display result is “big hit”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the preliminary determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a command for opening a big prize opening for 15 rounds, which designates display of an effect image during a period in which the big prize opening is open in each round, corresponding to the 15 rounds big hit state. Command A2XXH designates display of an effect image (for example, an effect image in an interval between rounds) during a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state at the end of each round, corresponding to the 15 round big hit state. This is a designation command for the round jackpot after opening the big prize opening. In the special command for opening the big prize opening for 15 rounds and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state. Is set.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the prior determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the prior determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. .

  Command A4XXH corresponds to the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “small hit”. This is a command for specifying the opening of the big prize opening for the accuracy and small hitting that designates the display of the effect image during the period when the big prize opening is in the open state in each round or variable winning action. Command A5XXH specifies the display of the effect image during the period when the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state by the end of each round or variable winning action corresponding to the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. This is a command that is designated after opening the big prize opening for small hits. In the command for opening the big prize opening for the accuracy / small hit and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the round in the big win state or the small hit game state (for example, “1” or “2” )), Different EXT data is set.

  The command B001H is for executing a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. This is a first start port winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition is satisfied. The command B002H is for executing a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting prize opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition is established.

  The command C0XXH is used to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 or the like. This is a pending storage count notification command for notifying the total pending storage count that is the total value of. In response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, for example, either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted as the reserved storage number notification command. Following this, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In the pending storage count notification command, for example, the total stored count (for example, “1” to “8”) of the pending data in the first special figure pending storage unit 151A and the reserved data in the second special figure pending storage unit 151B shown in FIG. Correspondingly, different EXT data is set. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the reserved memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the first special drawing is received. The total number of stored hold data in the hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B can be specified. The command D0XX is an opening pattern notification command for notifying the opening pattern of the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A random access memory (RAM) 102 that provides an area, a central processing unit (CPU) 103 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a random number circuit 104 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103, and I / O (Input / Output port) 105. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining the reach, a variation pattern The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the type, the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern, the random value MR6 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR7 for determining the open pattern are controlled to be countable. . In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR7. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR7 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated by the random number circuit 104 independently of the CPU 103, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR7 is randomized by the CPU 103. It may be updated by software using The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is determined whether the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as a big hit game state, whether the variable display result is "small hit" or not. This is a random value used to determine whether or not to control the gaming state, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”, for example.

  The random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is used as a plurality of specific variable display types such as “normal”, “probable change”, and “surprise” as the variable display mode of the decorative symbols when the variable display result is “big hit”. This is a random value used to determine one of the big hit types, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”, for example. The reach determination random number value MR3 is a random value used for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state when the variable display result is “lost”. ”To“ 239 ”.

  The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number value MR4 ranges from “1” to “241”. Takes the value of The random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern of the decorative design as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, the random number MR5 is a value in the range of “1” to “251”. Take.

  The random value MR6 for determining the general-purpose display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “150”. That is, the random value MR6 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the normal start-up winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game (normally open state). ) Is used to determine whether or not it is changed to a state in which a game ball can easily enter (expanded open state). The random number MR7 for determining the opening pattern is a random value used to determine the opening pattern of the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. The value is in the range of “1” to “100”.

  FIG. 6 shows variations in decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the cases where the variable display mode of decorative symbols is “non-reach” and “reach” when the variable display result is “losing”. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates a pattern. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-5 and non-reach PB1− are the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”. 1 and non-reach PB1-2, non-reach PC1-1 and non-reach PC1-2 variation patterns are prepared. In addition, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4, super PA3-1 to super PA3-6, super PB3-1 to super PB3- 3. Fluctuation patterns of Super PC 3-1 to Super PC 3-4 are prepared.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, super PA4-1 to super PA4 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. -6, Super PA5-1 to Super PA5-3, Super PB4-1 to Super PB4-3, Super PB5-1 to Super PB5-3, Super PD1-1 and Super PD1-2, Super PE1-1 and Super PE1 -2, special PG1-1 to special PG1-7, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2, and special PG3-1 variation patterns are prepared.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation pattern of decorative symbols prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, special PH1-1 to special PH1-7, special PH2-1 to special PH2-1 as special fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “small hit”. Variation patterns of PH2-2 and special PH3-1 are prepared.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables and determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a variation pattern for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative symbols. Table data constituting the table is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of a symbol display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, as the symbol display result determination table, a first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A, a second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. An ordinary map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 9C is prepared in advance. The first special figure display result determination table 130A has a variable display result before a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination. The first special figure display result determination table 130A is a random number MR1 for determining a special figure display result depending on whether the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on. Are set data (determination data), etc., associated with (assigned to) big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, and loss determination value data. The second special figure display result determination table 130B shows the variable display result before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Whether or not to control the big hit gaming state as "big hit" and whether to control the small hit game state as "small hit" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result It is a table referred to for determination. The second special figure display result determination table 130B sets the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the big hit determination value data, the small hit determination data, and the loss depending on whether the probability variation flag is OFF or ON. It consists of decision data to be assigned to decision value data.

  In the ordinary figure display result determination table 130C, the comparison with the random number MR6 for determining the ordinary figure display result is made depending on whether the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 shown in FIG. 20 is off or on. The numerical value (judgment value) to be assigned is assigned to either the common figure judgment value data or the common figure loss judgment value data. The general map display result determination table 130C is used for setting the general map change time to one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of whether or not the random number MR6 matches the determination value data per universal map. When the data or the random number MR6 matches the judgment value data per map, the time for performing tilt control (tilt control time) for allowing the game ball to easily enter the second start winning opening, and the time flag is OFF Data for setting for setting depending on whether it is present or on may be included.

  In the setting of the general map display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 9C, the random number value MR6 for determining the general map display result is any one of “1” to “15” corresponding to the case where the time reduction flag is off. In the meantime, the random value MR6 for determining the normal map display result is “1” to “140” corresponding to the case where the time reduction flag is on. The determination value is allocated to the determination value data for the normal map and the determination value data for the general-purpose loss so that the determination value matches the determination value data for the normal map. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the time reduction state, the variable display result in the normal game is “per normal illustration” compared to when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. And the frequency at which the tilt control is performed so that the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening can be increased. Further, the normal time fluctuation times TH3 and TH4 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is on are set shorter than the normal time fluctuation times TH1 and TH2 corresponding to when the time reduction flag is off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on corresponding to the time reduction state, the normal time fluctuation time in the normal game is shortened compared to when the time reduction flag is off corresponding to the normal state. It is possible to increase the frequency at which tilt control is performed so that the game ball can easily win the 2 start winning opening. Further, the tilt control time TK2 corresponding to the time reduction flag being on is set longer than the tilt control time TK1 corresponding to the time reduction flag being off. With such a setting, when the time reduction flag is on, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening than when it is off.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” and it is determined to control to the big hit game state, the big hit type determination table 131 is based on the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variable display mode as one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprising accuracy”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the variation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 20 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” or “probability” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15 round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round big hit state. In addition, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “normal” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability change” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  FIG. 11 shows a configuration example of a jackpot variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G shown in FIGS. 11A to 11G are prepared in advance as jackpot variation pattern type determination tables. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G determine the variation pattern type for determining the variation pattern type according to the determination result of the jackpot type when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR4. Each big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A-132G is selected according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. In other words, the game state is selected depending on whether the game state is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state, and the determination result of the jackpot type.

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variable pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is “normal”, “probability change”, or “probability”. Numerical values (determined values) are fluctuation patterns of normal CA3-1, super CA3-2 to super CA3-6, super CB3-1, super CB3-2, special CA4-1, special CB4-1, and special CC4-1. Assigned to one of the types.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G, a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of big hit types is determined. ing. For example, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A used when the big hit type is “normal” and the big hit type is “probable change”. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B used when “”, the assignment of the determination values to the variation pattern types of the normal CA 3-1 and the super CA 3-2 is different. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3, while in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B, the variation pattern type of the super CA 3-3 is set. No decision value is assigned to it. On the other hand, in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A, no decision value is assigned to the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 3-4, while in the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132B, the fluctuation of the super CA 3-4 A decision value is assigned to the pattern type.

  In this way, when the gaming state is one of the normal state, the probability variation state, and the short-time state, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type in each gaming state (when in the normal state) ), The big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132D to 132F (selected when the probability variation state), and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A, 132B, 132G (selected when the time is short state) are compared, according to the big hit type The assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type is different. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the jackpot type. In this way, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the jackpot type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be made different.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F, 132G used when the big hit type is “Accuracy”, for example, the big hit type such as Special CA4-1, Special CB4-1, Special CC4-1 is other than “Accuracy”. In some cases, a decision value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no decision value is assigned. Thus, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “surprise”, when the control is made to the two round big hit state, the variation pattern type different from the case of controlling to the 15 round big hit state is determined. be able to.

  When the jackpot type is determined to be “normal”, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A used when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a short-time state, and the game In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 11D used when the state is a probable variation state, assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 and super CA3-2 is different. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3, while in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132D, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3 is determined. No decision value has been assigned. As described above, when the big hit type is determined to be “normal”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A and 132D (“normal” are selected) according to the gaming state. When the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132B and 132E (selected when “probability change”) and the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132C, 132F and 132G (selected when “probability”) are compared, the gaming state The determination value is assigned to each variation pattern type depending on whether the state is the normal state, the short-time state, or the probability variation state. In addition, a determined value may be assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the gaming state. Thus, depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probable variation state, different variation pattern types can be determined, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of the small hit variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C are prepared in advance as small hit variation pattern type determination tables. The small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “small hit”. A table that is referenced to determine one of the types. In each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C, according to the table selection setting as shown in FIG. Is selected as a use table. Each of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is for determining that the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned to any one of the variation pattern types of the special CA5-1, the special CB5-1, and the special CC5-1. It consists of data.

  Here, the variation pattern type of the special CA 5-1 to which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133A for small hits shown in FIG. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. In the variation pattern type of the special CB5-1 to which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133B for small hits shown in FIG. 13B, the big hit shown in FIG. The random pattern MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is also assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 132F for use. The variation pattern type of the special CC 5-1 to which the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned in the variation pattern type determination table 133C for small hits shown in FIG. 13C is a big hit shown in FIG. Also in the variation pattern type determination table 132G for use, a random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned. As described above, the variation pattern types of the special CA5-1, the special CB5-1, and the special CC5-1 are common variations in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a pattern type. That is, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 11 (C), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132F shown in FIG. 11 (F), and FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132G shown in G) is set to include a variation pattern type that is common to the variation pattern type determined when the variable display result is “small hit”.

  FIG. 14 shows a configuration example of a reach determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach determination tables 134A to 134C shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C are prepared in advance as reach determination tables. The reach determination tables 134A to 134C indicate whether or not to change the variable display state of the decorative symbols to the reach state when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variable display result is “losing”. Is a table that is referred to for determination based on Each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected according to a table selection setting as shown in FIG. That is, the game state is selected according to whether it is a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-short state. In each of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C, numerical values (determination values) compared with the reach determination random value MR3 are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, and non-reach HB1-2. , Non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 determination result that does not reach reach, reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 reach determination Assigned to one of the results.

  For example, in the setting of the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the value in the range of “1” to “204” is non-reach HA1-1 corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “0”. And a value in the range of “205” to “239” is assigned to the reach HA 2-1. Corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “1”, a value in the range of “1” to “217” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-2. Assigned. A value in the range of “1” to “220” that is larger than the number of determination values assigned to the non-reach HA 1-1 and the non-reach HA 1-2 corresponding to the case where the total pending storage number is “2” Allocated to reach HA1-3. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, “1” to “230”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-3. The determination value in the range is assigned to the non-reach HA1-4. Corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved memories is any one of “5” to “8”, “1” to “1”, which is larger than the number of determination values assigned to each of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-4. A determination value in the range of “235” is assigned to the non-reach HA 1-5. With such a setting, when the total number of reserved memories, which is the number of held special figure games, is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “3”), the variable display state of the decorative symbols is changed compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. The rate at which the determination to reach the reach state is made lower. If the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “non-reach” is set to be shorter than the average special symbol variation time in the variation pattern corresponding to “reach”. When the special figure holding storage number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened as compared with the case where the special figure reserved memory number is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the special figure holding storage number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number, it becomes possible to quickly digest the variable display in which the variable display result is “losing”, so that the operation rate can be improved. It should be noted that in the setting of the reach determination tables 134B and 134C shown in FIGS. 14B and 14C, the decorative symbol variable display state is set regardless of whether the total reserved storage number is “0” to “8”. Although the ratio of determination to reach the reach state is the same, as in the reach determination table 134A, when the total pending storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (for example, “2”), it is less than the predetermined number. Compared to a certain case, the proportion of the determination that the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state may be reduced.

  FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C are prepared in advance as reach variation pattern type determination tables. The reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display state of the decorative symbol is the reach state (reach determination). It is a table that is referenced to determine one of the types. Each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected as a use table in accordance with a determination result indicating reach state such as reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1. . That is, the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3 is selected, and the reach variation pattern is determined depending on the determination result indicating that the reach HAB2-1 is selected. The type determination table 135B is selected as the usage table, and the reach variation pattern type determination table 135C is selected as the usage table according to the determination result indicating that the reach HC2-1 is selected. In each of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C, depending on whether the determination result indicating that the reach state is set is reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, or reach HC2-1. The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the value of the random number MR4 for determining the pattern type is the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1, super CA2-2, super CA2-3, super CB2-1, super CB2-2. Assigned to one.

  For example, in the reach variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 15A, the value (determined value) in the range from “1” to “128” is normal corresponding to the determination result indicating that the reach is HA2-1. It is assigned to the variation pattern type of CA2-1, and other values are assigned to the variation pattern types of super CA2-2 and super CA2-3. Corresponding to the determination result to reach reach 2-2, a value in the range of “1” to “170” is assigned to the variation pattern type of normal CA2-1. Further, in response to the determination result that the reach HA2-3 is selected, a value in the range of “1” to “182” is assigned to the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. In the reach HA 2-1, the reach determination table 133 </ b> A shown in FIG. 14A has a determination value that is compared with the reach determination random value MR <b> 3 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. Assigned. A determination value is assigned to the reach HA 2-2 in correspondence with the case where the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”. The reach HA2-3 is assigned a determination value corresponding to the case where the total number of reserved storage is “3” or “4” or any one of “5” to “8”. With these settings, when the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, “1”), the variation of normal CA 2-1 in which the “normal” reach effect is executed is compared to when the total number is less than the predetermined number. The ratio determined for the pattern type increases. And, the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the “normal” reach effect is shorter than the variation time of the average special symbol in the variation pattern that executes the reach effect other than “normal”. If the total number of reserved memories is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the total number of reserved storage is less than the predetermined number.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a non-reach variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C are prepared in advance as non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination tables. The non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C have a plurality of variation pattern types based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display state is not set to the reach state. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of them. Each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C includes non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2. It is selected as a usage table according to the determination result indicating that the state is not set. That is, the non-reach fluctuation pattern type determination table 136A is selected as a usage table according to the determination results of the non-reach HA 1-1 to non-reach HA 1-5, and according to the determination results of the non-reach HB1-1 and non-reach HB1-2. Thus, the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136B is selected as the usage table, and the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C is selected as the usage table according to the determination results of the non-reach HC1-1 and non-reach HC1-2. In each of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C, determination results indicating that the reach state is not set are non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5, non-reach HB1-1, non-reach HB1-2, and non-reach HC1-. 1 and non-reach HC1-2, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type is non-reach CA1-1 to non-reach CA1-4, The non-reach CB1-1 to the non-reach CB1-3 and the non-reach CC1-1 to the non-reach CC1-3 are assigned to any one of the variation pattern types.

  FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the big hit variation pattern determination table 137A and the small hit variation pattern determination table 137B stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot variation pattern determination table 137A shown in FIG. 17A shows the variation pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type or variation pattern type when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variable display result is “big hit”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the random number value MR5 for determination. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table 137A, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type corresponds to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “big hit”. Assigned to one of multiple types of variation patterns. The small hit variation pattern determination table 137B shown in FIG. 17B determines the variation pattern according to the determination result of the variation pattern type or the like when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variable display result is “small hit”. This table is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR5. In the small hit variation pattern determination table 137B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the decorative symbol variable display result is “small hit”. It is assigned to one of a plurality of corresponding variation patterns. Here, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, special PG1-1 to special PG1-7, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, and special PG3-1. A decision value is assigned to one of the fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern of any one of special PH1-1 to special PH1-7, special PH2-1, special PH2-2, and special PH3-1 is used. A decision value is assigned. For this reason, on the side of the effect control board 12, the change pattern notification command for designating any of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-7, the special PG2-1, the special PG2-2, and the special PG3-1 from the main board 11. Or a variable pattern notification command specifying one of special PH1-1 to special PH1-7, special PH2-1, special PH2-2, or special PH3-1. It is possible to identify whether the big hit type is the big hit type “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of the loss variation pattern determination table 138 stored in the ROM 101. The loss variation pattern determination table 138 is used for determining a variation pattern according to whether or not to reach a reach state or the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the variable display result is “lost”. This table is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR5. In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type corresponds to the case where the decorative symbol variable display result is “lost”. Assigned to one of multiple types of variation patterns.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, “slip” such as non-reach PA1-4 or non-reach PA1-5, or “slip” corresponding to the case of non-reach variation pattern types such as non-reach CA1-4 or non-reach CC1-3. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern (see FIG. 6) that executes a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. With this setting, the non-reach PA1-4 and the non-reach PA1-5 correspond to the determination that the decorative symbol variable display result is “losing” and the determination that the decorative symbol variable display state is not the reach state. Variable display effect of “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” (non-reach PA1-4 “sliding” variable display effect, non-reach PA1-5 of “pseudo-continuous” (Variable display effect) can be executed.

  Non-reach CA1-4 variation pattern types including non-reach PA1-5 are compared with the random value MR5 for variation pattern type determination in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136A shown in FIG. Among the determined values, determined values in the range of “217” to “241” are assigned according to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, and “230” to “241” are determined according to the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-2. ”Is assigned, a decision value in the range of“ 231 ”to“ 241 ”is assigned according to the determination result of non-reach HA1-3, and“ 237 ”is assigned according to the determination result of non-reach HA1-4. ”To“ 241 ”in the range, and determined values in the range“ 237 ”to“ 241 ”are assigned according to the determination result of non-reach HA 1-5.

  Here, for the determination result of the non-reach HA 1-1, in the reach determination table 134A shown in FIG. 14A, the reach determination randomness corresponds to the case where the total reserved storage number is “0”. Among the determination values to be compared with the numerical value MR3, determination values in the range of “1” to “204” are assigned. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-2, in the reach determination table 134A, the determination value compared with the reach determination random value MR3 corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “1” , “1” to “217” are assigned determination values. For the determination result of non-reach HA1-3, in the reach determination table 134A, corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “2”, among the determination values compared with the random value MR3 for reach determination , “1” to “220” are assigned determination values. The determination result of the non-reach HA1-4 is compared with the reach determination random number value MR3 in the reach determination table 134A corresponding to the case where the total reserved storage number is “3” or “4”. Among the determination values, determination values in the range of “1” to “230” are assigned. The non-reach HA 1-5 determination result is compared with the reach determination random number MR3 in the reach determination table 134A corresponding to the case where the number of reserved storage is any of “5” to “8”. Among the determination values to be determined, determination values in the range of “1” to “235” are assigned. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “1” or “2”, non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is included compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0”. The ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 becomes low. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or “4”, the non-reach CA1 is compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” or “1” or “2”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of -4 is low. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is any one of “5” to “8”, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach CA1-4 compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” to “4”. The rate determined for the type is low.

  The variation pattern types of non-reach CC1-3 including non-reach PA1-5 are compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern type in the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. Among the determined values, determined values in the range of “234” to “241” are assigned according to the determination result of non-reach HC1-1, and “235” to “241” are determined according to the determination result of non-reach HC1-2. ”Is determined. For the determination result of non-reach HC1-1, in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. 14C, when the total reserved storage number is “0” or “1”, the reach determination random number MR3 Among the determination values to be compared, the determination values in the range of “1” to “231” are assigned. The determination result of non-reach HC1-2 is compared with the reach determination random number MR3 when the total number of reserved storage is “2” or more in the reach determination table 134C shown in FIG. Among the determination values, a determination value in the range of “1” to “231” is assigned. In the non-reach variation pattern type determination table 136C shown in FIG. 16C, the non-reach CC1-3 is determined when the non-reach HC1-2 determination result is higher than the non-reach HC1-1 determination result. The number of determination values allocated to the variation pattern type is set to be small. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is “2” or more, non-reach PA1-5 (including “pseudo-continuous”) is compared to the case where the total number of reserved memories is “0” or “1”. The ratio determined for the variation pattern type of the non-reach CC1-3 to be included becomes low.

  In the variation pattern shown in FIG. 6, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 in which the variable display effect of “sliding” or “pseudo-ream” is not executed is 5.75 seconds, and the non-reach PA1-2. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern is 3.75 seconds, and the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-3 is 1.50 seconds. On the other hand, the variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 in which the “sliding” variable display effect is executed is 8.25 seconds, and the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol in the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-5 is 16.70 seconds. That is, the special symbol variation time in the variation pattern in which the variable display effect of “slip” or “pseudo-run” is executed corresponding to “non-reach” is the special symbol in the variation pattern in which these effect operations are not executed. It is longer than the fluctuation time. Then, when the total number of reserved storage is “1” or more, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 1-4 that executes the variable display effect of “slip” or “pseudo-continuous” as compared with the case of “0”. The proportion determined to be low. Further, when the total number of reserved memories is “3” or more, the ratio determined as the variation pattern type of non-reach CA1-4 is lower than when the total number of stored memories is less than “3”. Therefore, when the total number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the average special symbol variation time can be shortened compared to when the total number of reserved memories is less than the predetermined number.

  In the loss variation pattern determination table 138, the variation pattern determination disturbance 138 includes a variation pattern that executes a “normal” reach effect such as normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-4 included in the variation pattern type of the normal CA2-1. A decision value to be compared with the numerical value MR5 is assigned. Further, the variation pattern for executing the reach effect α1 such as super PA3-1 to super PA3-3 and the change pattern for executing the reach effect α2 such as super PA3-4 to super PA3-6 are the variation pattern types of the super CA2-2. A determination value to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is allocated so as to be included. It is compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern so that the variation pattern for executing the reach effect β1 such as the super PB3-1 to the super PB3-3 is included in the variation pattern types of the super CA2-3 and the super CB2-1. A decision value is allocated.

  For example, as for the variation pattern (see FIG. 6) for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, like the variation pattern of super PA3-3, super PA3-6, and super PB3-3, the pseudo-continuous variation is performed. The variation pattern type is classified according to the type of the effect operation in the reach effect that is executed based on the fact that the variable display state of the decorative design is changed to the reach state after being broken. That is, since the fluctuation pattern of the super PA 3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect α1, so as to be included in the fluctuation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss fluctuation pattern determination table 138 shown in FIG. A determination value to be compared with the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is assigned. Since the variation pattern of the super PA 3-6 is a variation pattern for executing the reach effect α2, the variation pattern determination variation 138 is included in the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-2 in the loss variation pattern determination table 138. A decision value to be compared with the numerical value MR5 is assigned. Since the fluctuation pattern of the super PB3-3 is a fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect β1, the fluctuation pattern determination table 138 changes so as to be included in the fluctuation pattern types of the super CA2-3 and the super CB2-1. A determination value to be compared with the random number MR5 for pattern determination is assigned.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of the release pattern determination table 139 stored in the ROM 101. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” (preliminary determination), the open pattern determination table 139 determines the open pattern according to the variable display result or the determination result of the big hit type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of opening patterns based on the random value MR7. In the opening pattern determination table 139, a random value for determining an opening pattern is selected depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the big hit type when the variable display result is “big hit”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with MR7 is assigned to one of the open patterns of open KP1-1 to open KP1-3. The release pattern determination table 139 sets the value (release pattern buffer value) of the release pattern buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 to a value corresponding to the determined release pattern (for example, any one of “0” to “2”). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  Here, in the opening pattern of the opening KP1-1, the opening / closing plate of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 generates a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls, which is the first period. During this period, the special winning prize ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous for the player by making the special winning opening in the open state 15 times. Further, in the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is 15 round big hit state After a round that is a second period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first period is executed once, the game returns to the second state, which is disadvantageous for the player in the second period (for example, 1 second). A round for changing to the first state in the second period (for example, 1 second) is executed once. Further, in the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the big winning opening is opened by the opening / closing plate) is the 15 round big hit state After a round that is a second period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first period is executed once, the game returns to the second state, which is disadvantageous for the player in the third period (for example, 2 seconds). A round for changing to the first state in the second period (for example, 1 second) is executed once. In addition, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the big hit symbol or the small hit in the special figure game corresponding to the open pattern The design may be different. For example, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, if the open pattern is open KP1-2, the big hit symbol is set as a special symbol indicating the number “1” and the open pattern is opened In the case of KP1-3, the jackpot symbol may be a special symbol indicating the number “2”. Similarly, when the variable display result is “small hit”, if the open pattern is open KP1-2, the small hit symbol is a special symbol indicating the number “5”, and if the open pattern is open KP1-3. The small hit symbol may be a special symbol indicating the number “6”. On the other hand, when the variable display result is a “big hit” big hit symbol indicating the number “1”, the open pattern is set to open KP1-2, and the variable display result is “high accuracy” indicating the number “2”. The open pattern may be set to open KP1-3 when a big hit symbol is achieved. Similarly, when the variable display result is a small hit symbol indicating the number “5”, the release pattern is KP1-2, and when the variable display result is a small hit symbol indicating the number “6”. The opening pattern may be opening KP1-3.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2, game control as shown in FIG. 20, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A data holding area 150 is provided. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 20 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, and a game control. A counter setting unit 154 and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting condition is satisfied but the first starting condition is not satisfied. The hold data of (a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure hold storage unit 151A is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition by winning in association with the hold number in the order of winning in the first start winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. Hold data of a game (a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B is extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the winning in association with the holding number in the winning order to the second starting winning opening. The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type are reserved data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). .

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, a big hit start flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In the step S15 of FIG. 37 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 38, it is instructed which process should be selected and executed. The ordinary symbol process flag indicates which process in the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 37 or the ordinary symbol process shown in FIG. 48 executed to control the progress of the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20. Indicates whether to select and execute.

  The big hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The small hit flag is set to an on state corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, it is cleared and turned off in response to, for example, the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game. The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the time reduction state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the completion of the time reduction state. .

  The big hit start flag is set to the on state in response to the display result in the special display game or the variable display of the decorative symbol being “big hit”. On the other hand, the big hit start flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big winning opening being opened in the first round in the big hit gaming state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. It is used as a down counter that counts down automatically. Alternatively, the game control process timer is used as an up-counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time point, such as a big hit game state or a small hit game state start point, and periodically counts up. May be.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game. As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The normal map change timer is for measuring the time for controlling the progress of the normal game, such as the normal map change time, which is the execution time of the normal game, on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a random counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, a total reserved memory number counter, a round number counter, a winning number counter, and the like. .

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 counts a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104, so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software. belongs to. For example, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 stores numerical data indicating the random number values MR2, MR3, MR3, and MR4 as random count values. In addition, numerical data indicating each random number value is updated.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The round number counter is for counting the number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round is completed and the next round is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated. The round number counter may also count the number of executions of the variable winning operation in the small hit gaming state. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening. For example, data indicating a count initial value “0” is set in the winning number counter as the winning number count value every time the round starts. Each time a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning number count value is incremented by one and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a variable special figure designation buffer, a big hit type buffer, an open pattern buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area where setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and a plurality of buffer areas may be used as a ring buffer.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “1” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Set to Further, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0” in response to the completion of the special figure game.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. As an example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. 10, if the jackpot type is “normal”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0” and the jackpot type is “probable change”. For example, “1” is set to the big hit type buffer value, and “2” is set to the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type is “surprise”.

  The opening pattern buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result that the opening pattern of the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is one of a plurality of types. As an example, based on the setting in the release pattern determination table 139 as shown in FIG. 19, if the release pattern is release KP1-1, the release pattern buffer value is set to “0”, and the release pattern is release KP1-2. If so, “1” is set to the release pattern buffer value, and “2” is set to the release pattern buffer value if the release pattern is release KP1-3.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 has an input port for taking in various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes a program read from the ROM 121, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal to the sound control board 13, and a lamp control board 14. On the other hand, wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal is connected. Furthermore, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal from the operation button 30 is also connected to the effect control board 12.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. FIG. 21 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 21, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols, temporary stop symbols for promotion effect determination Random number value SR2, random number value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding / development chance, random number values SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbols, for determining the promotion effect execution The random number value SR5, the random value SR6 for determining the sliding pattern, the random value SR7 for determining the button effect execution, the random value SR8 for determining the effect mode, and the random value SR9 for determining the special effect are counted. Controlled as possible. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. The random number circuit 124 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5 to SR9. The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 36, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-3, SR5 to SR9 may be counted. Further, when the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 uses the random counter to select random values SR1-1 to SR1-3, SR2, SR3, SR4-1 to SR4-. 3, numerical data indicating all of SR5 to SR9 may be counted.

  The random numbers SR1-1 to SR1-3 for determining the first to third final stop symbols are “left” and “middle” in the display area of the image display device 5 as fixed decorative symbols that are variable display results of decorative symbols. , A random number value used to determine a decorative symbol (final stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that the final stop symbol here is finally stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R when the decorative symbol variable display ends. These are the three decorative designs. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is “1” to “ The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “96”.

  The random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the promotion effect is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for "left", "middle", and "right" when executing the promotion effect during change. It is a random value used to determine the decorative pattern of the normal jackpot combination to be displayed, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “80”. The random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of slipping / development chance is “left”, “middle” when executing the variable display effect of “slip” or when executing the variable display effect of “development chance”. ”,“ Right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are random numbers used to determine a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Takes a value.

  The random numbers SR4-1 to SR4-3 for determining the first to third pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbols are “left”, “middle”, and “right” when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. These random number values are used to determine the combination of temporary stop symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. As an example, the first pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-1 takes a value in the range of “1” to “211”, and the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination random value SR4-2. Takes a value in the range of “1” to “229”, and the random value SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol takes a value in the range of “1” to “311”.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”, the random effect value SR5 for promotion effect execution determination executes the changing promotion effect or the jackpot promotion effect. It is a random value used to determine whether or not, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The random value SR6 for determining the slip pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types of slip patterns corresponding to the contents of the variable display effect when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed. It is a numerical value and takes a value in the range of “1” to “71”.

  Whether the button effect execution determination random number SR7 is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”. It is a random value used for determining whether or not, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “200”. The random number SR8 for determining the effect mode includes a plurality of effect modes that are executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”. This is a random value used to determine one of the types, and takes a value in the range of “1” to “150”. The random number SR9 for determining the special effect is a random value used for determining whether or not the special effect is executed and the special effect is one of a plurality of types. Take.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  22A to 22C show configuration examples of final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 160 </ b> A to 160 </ b> C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from among a plurality of predetermined non-reach combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is a fixed ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L among the predetermined ornament symbols that are a predetermined non-reach combination. It is a table referred in order to determine the left last stop symbol FZ1-1 based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160A includes determination data that assigns the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It is composed of The final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is a final right symbol that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R among the predetermined decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. It is a table referred to in order to determine the stop symbol FZ1-2 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 or the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 160B stores the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol in accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1. It consists of data for determination assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. The final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is a final final symbol that is a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are predetermined non-reach combinations. This table is referred to for determining the stop symbol FZ1-3 based on the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, the third final stop symbol determination random number SR1-3, and the like. .

  Here, the determination table stored in the ROM 121 includes a left / right outcome determination table 161 as shown in FIG. 23. From the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, It is determined whether the left / right output type DC1-1 corresponds to LR0, LR11 to LR18, or LR31 to LR38. The final stop symbol determination table 160C has a third random number SR1- 3 is made up of data for determination and the like assigned to symbol numbers “1” to “8” of decorative symbols that become the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22 (B), the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is the same as the symbol number of the decorative symbol that becomes the right final stop symbol FZ1-2. Is not assigned the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol combination is a reach combination or a jackpot combination (except for the odd chance TC1 to TC4). It can be avoided. Further, in the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C, combinations of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, and the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3 are predetermined decorative symbols. The random number value SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to the portion that becomes the combination of. For example, even in a combination other than the reach combination or the big hit combination, the portion that becomes the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 shown in FIG. 3A, the portion that becomes the chance of chance TC1 to TC4 shown in FIG. In FIG. 24, the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is not assigned to a portion that is a fixed non-reach combination. With such an assignment, when a final decorative symbol that is a predetermined non-reach combination is determined as the final stop symbol, the final decorative symbol is a pseudo-continuous chance item GC1 to GC8, an odd chance item TC1 to TC4, or the like. There can be no non-reach combinations similar to the eyes.

  25A and 25B show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 162A and 162B are tables for determining a confirmed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 25 (A) has a left final stop that becomes a fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. The symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2, which is the final decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, are set as the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table that is referenced to make a decision based on it. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, symbol numbers “1” to “1” of decorative symbols (left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1, FZ2-2) that are the same as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. The final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 25 (B) is a final final stop symbol FZ2 that becomes a finalized decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C among the fixed decorative symbols that are reach-losing combinations. -3 is a table that is referred to to determine -3 based on the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol.

  The middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 constituting the reach-losing combination is specified by a symbol difference which is a difference value between the symbol numbers of the decorative symbols as the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2. That is, in the variable display of decorative symbols, the variation of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”, and “left” → “right” → “ In the case of deriving and displaying a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol in a predetermined order such as “middle”, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C where the decorative symbol is derived and displayed last. After the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 derived and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, the final stop symbol determination table 162B is used to determine “ The difference (design difference) between the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C and the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined at this time, a confirmed decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 derived and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C is determined. In the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the third final stop symbol determination is performed for symbol differences “−2”, “−1”, “+1”, and “+2” corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-3 for use is assigned.

  The final stop symbol determination table 162A compares the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol according to the variation patterns of the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PH2-1, and special PH2-2. The determined value is assigned to the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the decorative symbol that is the normal symbol, while the symbol number “ It is not assigned to “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”. Here, the variation patterns of the special PG 2-1, the special PG 2-2, the special PH 2-1, and the special PH 2-2 are all variable display results when the gaming state is the probability variation state as shown in FIG. 7. Is a variation pattern used when “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”. Therefore, according to the setting of the final stop symbol determination table 162A as shown in FIG. 25 (A), when the gaming state is the probability change state, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In this case, the same decorative symbols that are normal symbols are derived and displayed together in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, so that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. At this time, the player receives and displays the same decorative symbols, which are normal symbols, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. If it becomes “normal”, it is recognized that there is a possibility that the probability change state may end after the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, even when the reach state is reached by the same decorative symbol that is the normal symbol, if the big hit type becomes “surprise”, it is controlled again to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state. Thus, when the gaming state is a probable change state, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, after reaching the reach state with the same decorative design as the normal design, the final reach combination The stop symbol is derived and displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give the player who has recognized the possibility that the probability variation state is finished, the unexpectedness and joyful feeling that the probability variation state continues, and to improve the interest of the game. In the final stop symbol determination table 162A, even if the variation pattern of the special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PH2-1, and special PH2-2 is used, the symbol number of the decorative symbol that is the probability variation symbol is determined. A decision value may be assigned. In this case, by making the decision value assigned to the probability variable symbol smaller than the decision value assigned to the normal symbol, the ratio of reaching the reach state by the normal symbol is the ratio of reaching the reach state by the probability variable symbol. Higher than that.

  26A to 26C show configuration examples of the final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C stored in the ROM 121. FIG. The final stop symbol determination tables 163A to 163C are tables that are referred to in order to determine a combination of decorative symbols to be a definite decorative symbol from a plurality of predetermined jackpot combinations. For example, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 26 (A) includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as fixed decorative symbols that are usually a big hit combination. A table that is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are stopped and displayed together based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is. In the final stop symbol determination table 163A, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are set. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 26 (B) is arranged in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as the confirmed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. This table is referred to for determining the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 that are stopped and displayed based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol. . In the final stop symbol determination table 163B, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the probability variation symbols that are the same as the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are used for determining the first final stop symbol. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR1-1 is assigned. The final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 26C has “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C as fixed decorative symbols that are any of the chance chance items TC1 to TC4. Reference is made to determine the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1, FZ4-2, and FZ4-3, which are stopped and displayed at 5R, based on the first final stop symbol determination random number SR1-1. It is a table. In the final stop symbol determination table 163C, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is assigned to each of the probability chance items TC1 to TC4.

  FIG. 27 shows a configuration example of the promotion effect execution determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the promotion effect execution determination table, a changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A and a jackpot promotion effect execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 27B are prepared in advance. Has been. The changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A indicates whether or not the changing promotion effect is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change”. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR5-1 for execution determination. In the changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR5-1 for changing promotion effect execution determination depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. ) Is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect. The jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B indicates whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion execution is executed when the variable display result is “big hit” and the jackpot type is “normal” or “probable change”. This table is referred to for determination based on a random value SR5-2 for execution determination. In the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 164B, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR5-2 for determining the jackpot promotion promotion execution depending on whether the jackpot type is “normal” or “probability change”. ) Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot promotion effect, and the determination result of whether to execute the promotion success effect or the promotion failure effect when the jackpot promotion effect is executed. . Here, in the promotion success production, it is notified that it is in a probable state. On the other hand, in the promotion failure production, it is not notified that it is in a probable state. In the setting of the changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A shown in FIG. 27A, even when the big hit type is “normal”, the changing promotion effect is not executed at a constant rate (a ratio of 1/100). A determination to this effect is made. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is “normal”, the determination value in the changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A may be assigned so that the determination that the changing promotion effect is always executed is made. . That is, when the big hit type is “normal”, the determined values in the range of “1” to “100” may be allotted to the determination result to execute the changing promotion effect.

  FIG. 28 shows a configuration example of the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 for the promotion effect among the temporary stop symbol determination tables stored in the ROM 121. The temporary stop symbol determination table 165 for the promotion effect is referred to in order to determine a decorative symbol to be displayed for temporary stop when the promotion effect during change is executed based on the random value SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect. It is a table to be. In the promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table 165, the symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “6” of the normal symbols that are the same as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3. 8 ”is assigned a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect.

  FIG. 29 shows a configuration example of the slip pattern determination table 166 stored in the ROM 121. The slip pattern determination table 166 includes a plurality of slip patterns such as slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 based on a random value SR6 for determining a slip pattern when a variable display effect of “slip” is executed. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a slip pattern that becomes a use pattern. In the slip pattern determination table 166, non-reach PA1-4, normal PA2-2, normal PA2-4, normal PA2-6, normal PA2-8, super PA3-2, super PA3-5, super PA4-2, super PA4 -5, Super PA5-2, Super PB3-2, Super PB4-2, Super PB5-2, Super PC3-2, Super PC3-4, Super PD1-2, Super PE1-2, Special PG1-2, Special PG1 -5, special PG 1-7, special PG 2-2, special PH 1-2, special PH 1-5, special PH 1-7, special PH 2-2, etc. In accordance with (refer to FIG. 6 and FIG. 7), the slip patterns of the slip TP1-1 to the slip TP1-4 are Numerical values compared to the random number SR6 the titration, (decision value) is assigned.

  In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-1, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then the decorative symbols are displayed on the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-2, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and then the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed after being rapidly changed, thereby displaying the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-3, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped to display the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed. In the sliding pattern of the sliding TP1-4, after changing the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the “left” and “right” decorative symbols are displayed. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are displayed on the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and then the decorative symbols are redisplayed at a low speed and then stopped and displayed. An effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped is performed.

  FIG. 30 shows a temporary stop symbol determination at the time of sliding used to determine a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed in the temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121. A configuration example of a table is shown. In this embodiment, the slip temporary provision shown in FIGS. 30 (A) to 30 (D) is used as the slip temporary stop symbol determination table for determining the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip”. Stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are prepared in advance. Each slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D are selected according to which of the slip patterns TP1-1 to TP1-4. That is, when the slip pattern is slip TP1-1, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167A is selected as the use table, and when slip is TP1-2, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167B is the use table. If it is selected and slipping TP1-3, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167C is selected as the use table, and if it is slip TP1-4, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167D is selected as the use table. The In each of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D at the time of sliding, temporary stop symbols are obtained according to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols in the decorative symbol display area for changing the decorative symbols again. A value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is assigned to the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols.

  For example, in the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167A, the decoration that becomes the final stop symbol (right final stop symbol) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1. In accordance with the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the symbols, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols that become the right temporary stop symbols KZ1-1, A value to be compared (decision value) is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167B, the decorative symbol which becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-2. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2 are compared with the random number SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. Value (decision value) is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167C, the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (right final stop symbol) in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-3. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the right temporary stop symbols KZ1-3 are compared with the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. Value (decision value) is assigned. In the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167D, the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the slip pattern of the slip TP1-4 is displayed. In response to the symbol numbers “1” to “8”, the symbol numbers “1” to “8” of the decorative symbols to be the left temporary stop symbols KZ1-4 are compared with the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding. Value (decision value) is assigned.

  FIG. 31 shows a pseudo-temporary temporary stop used for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed in the temporary stop symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121. The structural example of the symbol determination table is shown. In this embodiment, as a pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table for determining a decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIGS. 31 (A) to (D). Temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D are prepared in advance. Each of the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D indicates whether the variation pattern is a non-reach PA1-5 or a special PG1-2 when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Any of PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, Special PH1-3 Is selected as a use table according to the remaining number of display operations that become pseudo-continuous variation (total revariation) executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. . The remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations is, for example, “0” in the decorative symbol fluctuation (pseudo continuous fluctuation) in which the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed, and the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed one time before that. The final stop symbol is set to “1” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) and “2” for the decorative symbol variation (pseudo continuous variation) in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed twice before. This corresponds to how many times the pseudo-continuous variation (variation in which the temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed) is executed until the pseudo continuous variation in which the fixed decorative symbol is displayed is stopped.

  As an example, in the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 168A, the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to the variation pattern being either non-reach PA1-5 or special PG1-2. When the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations to be executed is “1”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, The right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. Is selected as a usage table. The pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 168B has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super In response to any one of PB5-3, special PG1-3, and special PH1-3, the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed is “1”. ”, The left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R. Right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, use for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ2-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C. It is selected as a table.

  The pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination table 168C has a variation pattern of Super PA3-3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super When the remaining number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed in response to being either PB5-3 or special PG1-3 is “2” The left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the right temporary stop symbol KZ3, which is the right symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. -2, as a use table for determining the intermediate temporary stop symbol KZ3-3, which is the intermediate symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed in the "medium" decorative symbol display area 5C Be-option. The pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168D has a variation pattern of Super PB3-3 shown in FIG. 6, Super PA5-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, Special PH1-3 shown in FIG. When the re-variation that becomes the pseudo-continuous variation is executed three times in the “quasi-ream” variable display effect as in the case of the above, it is executed until the final decorative symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. In response to the remaining number of pseudo continuous fluctuations being “3”, the left temporary stop symbol KZ4-1, which is the left symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “right” decorative symbol display In the area 5R, the right temporary stop symbol KZ4-2, which is the right symbol to be displayed temporarily, and the middle temporary stop symbol KZ4-3, which is the middle symbol to be temporarily stopped in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, are determined. It is selected as the use table.

  In the pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A and 168B shown in FIGS. 31 (A) and 31 (B), the symbol of the decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (left final stop symbol) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, respectively. According to the numbers “1” to “8”, the first pseudo-continuous temporary provisions GC1 to GC8 constituted by combinations of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR3-1 for determining the stop symbol is assigned. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168C shown in FIG. 31C, the left temporary stop symbol KZ2-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ2-2, which are determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168B, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol 2-3 is one of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ3-1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR3-2 for determining the second pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chances GC1 to GC8. In the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168D shown in FIG. 31D, the left temporary stop symbol KZ3-1, the right temporary stop symbol KZ3-2, which are determined using the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168C, Depending on whether the combination of the temporary stop symbol KZ3-3 is the pseudo-continuous chance GC1-GC8, the pseudo-continuous composed of the combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ4-1, KZ4-2, KZ4-3 A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR3-3 for determining the third pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol is assigned to the chance points GC1 to GC8.

  By determining the temporary stop symbol using these pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A to 168D, for example, as shown in FIG. 32, the pseudo continuous variation (including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of “pseudo continuous”. ) In accordance with the number of executions of “)”, the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R Any of GC8 can be determined.

  FIG. 33 shows a configuration example of a button effect execution determination table stored in the ROM 121. The button effect execution determination table 169 determines whether or not to execute the button effect when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”. FIG. 10 is a table referred to for determination based on a random number SR7 for button effect execution determination. In the button operation effect execution determination table 169, whether or not the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random number SR7 for determining the button effect execution determines whether or not to execute the button effect depending on whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state. Is assigned to the decision result. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability variation state such as the normal state or the short time state, the value in the range of “1” to “50” among the random numbers SR7 for button effect execution determination is A value in the range of “51” to “200” is assigned to the determination result indicating that the button effect is not executed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a probable change state, a value in the range of “1” to “150” among the random value SR7 for determining the button effect execution determines that the button effect is executed. The value in the range of “151” to “200” is assigned to the determination result that the button effect is not executed. For this reason, when the gaming state is the probability changing state, the button effect is executed at a higher rate than when the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability changing state such as the normal state or the short time state.

  FIG. 34 shows a configuration example of an effect mode determination table stored in the ROM 121. The effect mode determination table 170 is based on the random number SR8 for determining the effect mode when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or when the variable display result is “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the production mode as one of mode A, mode B, and mode C. The effect mode determination table 170 is for determining that the random number SR8 for determining the effect mode is assigned to the effect modes of mode A, mode B, and mode C according to the release pattern notified by the release pattern notification command and the gaming state. It consists of data. Here, when the release pattern is the release KP1-2 and the game state is a game state other than the probability change state such as the normal state or the short time state, the game mode may be determined as the mode C effect mode. When the state is a certain change state, it is not determined to be the mode C effect mode. On the other hand, when the release pattern is release KP1-3 and the gaming state is a probable change state, the effect mode of mode C may be determined, while the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state. When the gaming state is other than the probability variation state, the mode C effect mode is not determined. That is, when the combination of the release pattern and the effect mode is the release pattern of the release KP1-2 and the effect mode of the mode C, the game state is a game state other than the probability change state such as the normal state or the short time state. On the other hand, when the combination of the opening pattern and the effect mode is the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 and the effect mode of the mode C, the gaming state is in a probable state. As described above, in the present embodiment, there is a case where it can be definitely recognized that the gaming state is in a probable state by the combination of the release pattern and the effect mode.

  The ROM 121 stores an effect control pattern table that stores a plurality of types of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control various effect operations. For example, the effect control pattern table includes a symbol variation control pattern table, a mode effect control pattern table, and various effect control pattern tables. In the symbol variation control pattern table, the image display device 5 corresponds to a plurality of variation patterns and the like in the period from when the variation of the ornament symbol is started until when the final symbol that is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control contents of various effect operations such as a variable display operation of a decorative design on the display screen, an effect display operation of a reach effect, and a display operation of a decorative design in a variable display effect such as `` slip '' or `` pseudo ream '', A plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns may be stored. The mode effect control pattern table only needs to store a plurality of types of data indicating control contents of various effect operations such as effect operations in various effect modes and effect operations in button effects as mode effect control patterns. In the various effect control pattern tables, it is only necessary to store a plurality of types of data indicating the contents of various effect controls during the period of control in the big hit gaming state as the effect control patterns. The effect control pattern table may be an address management table that manages the storage addresses of pattern data constituting a plurality of types of effect control patterns. In this case, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the production control pattern table is stored in a predetermined storage area, and pattern data constituting individual production control patterns may be stored in an area different from this storage area. .

  In this embodiment, a symbol variation control pattern 180 shown in FIG. 35 (A) is prepared in advance as a symbol variation control pattern included in the effect control pattern table, and as a mode effect control pattern table included in the effect control pattern table, A mode effect control pattern table 181 shown in FIG. 35 (B) is prepared in advance, and various effect control pattern tables 182 shown in FIG. 35 (C) are prepared in advance as various effect control pattern tables included in the effect control pattern table. As a special effect control pattern table included in the effect control pattern table, a special effect control pattern table 183 shown in FIG. 35D is prepared in advance.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 36, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 36 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. The effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 is provided with a probability change flag for determining whether or not it is in the probability change state, and a mode flag for determining the effect mode.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers that are used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various kinds of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the timing of switching effect images to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in various signals such as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the operation detection signal transmitted from the operation button 30, and effect control. And an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the substrate 12. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is generated from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the previous power supply stop. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to detect input from the switches 21, 22A, 22B, 23, etc. via the switch circuit 110. The state of the signal is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a main random number value update process for updating at least a part of the random number values MR1 to MR7 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B and setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. When the command control process is finished, the game control timer interrupt process is finished after the interrupt is permitted.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 37 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S100). FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning determination process.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first corresponds to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A among the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A provided in the ON state is on (step S201). At this time, if the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step S201; Yes), the first hold storage corresponding to the number of hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A. It is determined whether or not the number is a predetermined upper limit value (eg, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 may identify the first reserved memory number by reading the value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (first reserved memory number count value).

  If the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the first reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the first reserved memory number count value ( Step S203). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S204). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, whereby each random number value is stored (step S205). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address (first address) of the first start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, etc., to transmit the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12. Is set (step S206). The first start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 37 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the processing of step S206, for example, by adding 1 to the value of the total reserved memory number counter (total reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, the total reserved memory number is set to 1. Add (step S207). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved memory number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S209). . The reserved memory number notification command set in this way follows the first start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 37 after the special symbol process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  If the detection signal from the first start port switch 22A is in the OFF state in step S201 (step S201; No), or if the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes) ) Or, after the process of step S209 is executed, the detection signal from the second start opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the ON state. Is determined (step S210). At this time, if the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in an OFF state (step S210; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B is in the on state (step S210; Yes), it corresponds to the number of the hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S211). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the second reserved memory number by reading the value of the second reserved memory number counter (second reserved memory number count value) provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value in step S211 (step S211; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, when the second reserved memory number is not the upper limit value (step S211; No), the second reserved memory number is incremented by 1, for example, by adding 1 to the second reserved memory number count value. (Step S212). Then, from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are extracted (step S213). . Numerical value data indicating each random number value extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, whereby each random number value is stored (step S214). Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the second start opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed. (Step S215). The second start opening winning designation command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 37 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the process of step S215 is executed, the total reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (step S216), for example, by adding 1 to the total reserved memory number count value. Subsequently, for example, by setting the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the transmission command buffer, setting for transmitting the reserved storage number notification command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S218). . The reserved memory count notification command set in this way follows the second start winning prize designation command, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 37 after the special symbol process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the board 11 to the effect control board 12. After the start winning determination process as described above is executed, one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 shown in FIG. 38 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether the variable display result of the special symbol, the decorative symbol, the color symbol, etc. is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. A determination is made whether or not. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process is based on the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the determination result of whether or not the variable display state of the decorative design is the reach state, etc. Thus, a process of determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types in accordance with the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol variation process includes a process for performing setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the special figure variation time is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, a determination is made as to whether one of the big hit flag and the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. If the big hit flag is on, the special process flag is set. The value is updated to “4”, and when the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The pre-opening process for the special winning opening in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for the big winning opening is a process for starting the execution of the round in the big winning gaming state and setting the opening for the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” Etc. are included.

  The special winning opening releasing process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. This process during opening of the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the elapsed time measured, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. Processing for determining whether or not it is time to return the winning opening from the open state to the closed state is included. And when returning a special winning opening to a closed state, the process etc. which stop supply of the drive signal with respect to a predetermined solenoid should just be performed.

  The post-opening processing for the special winning opening in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. The post-opening process for the big prize opening includes a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the maximum number of open big prize openings, This includes a process for making a setting for transmitting an end designation command when hit. The special figure process flag value is updated to “7” when the maximum winning opening number is reached, and the special process flag value is updated to “7” when the maximum winning opening number is not reached. Update to 4 ".

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. This jackpot end process corresponds to a period in which an ending effect is performed as an effect operation for informing the end of the jackpot gaming state by the effect electric parts such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. For example, a process for waiting until the waiting time has elapsed and a process for performing various settings corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is in the open state is set to “1 second” corresponding to the maximum value of the number of big prize opening being “2” because the variable display result is “small hit”. ".

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the drive signal to a predetermined solenoid may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In the small hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by the electric parts for effects such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9. Processing that waits until the time has passed is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 103 first sums the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number based on, for example, the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. It is determined whether or not the total pending storage number as a value is “0” (step S231). At this time, if the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” (step S231; No), it is determined whether or not there is a reserved memory in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B (step S234).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the second special figure hold storage unit 151B does not have a hold storage (step S234; No), the first special figure hold storage unit 151A stores it in association with the hold number “1”. As the pending data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S235). At this time, for example, the first reserved memory number count value is decremented by 1, and the first reserved memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S236). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, the value of the special fluctuation designation buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (the fluctuation special figure) The designated buffer value) is set to “1” (step S237).

  After the process of step S237 is executed, a first table shown in FIG. 9A is used as a usage table for determining whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. The figure display result determination table 130A is selected and set (step S238). For example, in the process of step S238, the storage address (first address) of the first special figure display result determination table 130A in the ROM 101 may be set in a determination table pointer or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The CPU 103 refers to the first special figure display result determination table 130A set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235 is the big hit determination value data. (Step S239).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S239 (step S239; No), the numerical value indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S235. It is determined whether or not the data matches the small hit determination value data (step S240). At this time, if it matches with the small hit determination value data (step S240; Yes), the small hit flag is set to the on state (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S234 that the second special figure hold storage unit 151B has a hold storage (step S234; Yes), the second special figure hold storage unit 151B stores it in association with the hold number “1”. As the pending data, the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are respectively read (step S242). At this time, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory number count value, the second reserved memory number is updated so as to be decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B uses the reserved number “1”. The storage contents of the hold data stored in the lower entries (for example, entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) are shifted up by one entry (step S243). Then, in response to starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” (step S244).

  After the process of step S244 is executed, a second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 130B is selected and set (step S245). For example, in the process of step S245, the storage address of the second special figure display result determination table 130B in the ROM 101 may be set in the determination table pointer or the like. The CPU 103 refers to the second special figure display result determination table 130B set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read in step S242 is the jackpot determination value data. (Step S246).

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value data in step S239 or step S246 (step S239; Yes, or step S246; Yes), the jackpot provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 The flag is set to an on state (step S247). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S248). The big hit type is set to “normal” by referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in step S248 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type read in step S235 or step S242. , “Probability change” and “probability” are determined (step S249). When the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S244, a random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type determining table 131. As a result, the jackpot type is not determined to be “accurate”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S249, the jackpot type buffer value is set to one of “0” to “2” (step S250). When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value data in step S246 (step S246; No), the process proceeds to step S240, and by referring to the second special figure display result determination table 130B, step S242 is performed. It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result read out in step 2 matches the small hit determination value data (step S240).

  After executing one of the processes of step S241 and step S250, the maximum winning opening opening number is set (step S251). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 35, if the big hit type is either “normal” or “probability change”, the maximum value for the number of big winning opening is set to “15” corresponding to the 15-time open game. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise” or when the variable display result is “small hit”, the maximum value of the number of big winning opening is set to “2” corresponding to the two-time open game. To do.

  When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in Step S240 (Step S240; No), or after executing the processing of Step S251, the variable display result is determined and the big hit type is determined. Corresponding to the result of the determination, a confirmed special symbol is set (step S252). As an example, if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the small hit determination value data in step S240, or if the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 does not match the big hit determination value data in step S246, it is variable. Corresponding to the determination result that the display result is “lost”, the special symbol indicating the “−” symbol that becomes the lost symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value data in step S240, the small hit symbol is obtained corresponding to the determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “5” is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, when the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 matches the big hit determination value data in step S239 or step S246, “1”, “3”, which become the big hit symbols, according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S249. ”Or“ 7 ”, one of the special symbols indicating the number is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “normal”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that is the normal jackpot symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is any one of “first probability variation” to “fourth probability variation”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability variation big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “surprise”, the special symbol indicating the number “1” that becomes the two round big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S252, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S253), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . If the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S254), and the special symbol normal process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the table selection shown in FIG. 12 (F) is made based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state. According to the setting, any one of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132G is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types (step S262). Here, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified from the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S263). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S263; Yes), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, the table shown in FIG. In accordance with the selection setting, any one of the small hit variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types (step S264).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S263 (step S263; No), based on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the short-time state, FIG. In accordance with the table selection setting shown in FIG. 6, any one of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C is selected and set as a use table for determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state (step S265). At this time, for example, the total reserved memory number is specified by reading the total reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S266). Subsequently, a random value MR3 for reach determination is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S267). Then, based on the reach determination random value MR3 extracted in step S267, the presence or absence of the reach state is determined by referring to any of the reach determination tables 134A to 134C set in step S265 (step S268). .

  If a determination result indicating that there is a reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; Yes). In order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of the reach state such as the determination results of reach HA2-1 to reach HA2-3, reach HB2-1, reach HC2-1 in step S268. As the use table, one of the reach variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C is selected and set (step S270). On the other hand, when a determination result indicating that there is no reach state is obtained in step S268 (step S269; No), non-reach HA1-1 to non-reach HA1-5 and non-reach HB1- in step S268. As a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the determination result of no reach state such as the determination result of 1, non-reach HB1-2, non-reach HC1-1, non-reach HC1-2 Then, any one of the non-reach variation pattern type determination tables 136A to 136C is selected and set (step S271).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S272). ). Then, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted in step S272, by referring to the use table set in any of steps S262, S264, S270, and S271, a plurality of variation pattern types are selected. Either one is determined (step S273).

  Here, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol on the basis that the first starting condition is satisfied. Whether to determine the type, or to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Regardless, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S272 and S273, the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to change by the common processing module regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. The pattern type can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S273, the variation pattern type may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  After the variation pattern type is thus determined in step S273, the big hit variation pattern determination table 137A, the small hit variation pattern determination table 137A is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type. One of a plurality of types of variation pattern determination tables such as the hit variation pattern determination table 137B and the loss variation pattern determination tables 138A and 138B is selected and set (step S274). Subsequently, a random value MR4 for determining a variation pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S275). Then, based on the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern extracted in step S275, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S274 (step S276). .

  Here, in the processes of steps S275 and S276, the decorative symbol variation pattern corresponding to the special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol when the first start condition is satisfied. Whether or not the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied Instead, the variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the common random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern updated by a common random counter or the like. Further, in the processing of steps S275 and S276, the variation pattern is detected by the common processing module using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern regardless of the determination result of the presence or absence of the reach state in step S268. Can be determined as one of a plurality of types. As an example, in the process of step S276, the variation pattern may be determined with reference to the determination table stored at the address of the ROM 101 set in the determination table pointer.

  Following the determination of the variation pattern in step S276, a special figure variation time corresponding to the determination result of the variation pattern is set (step S277). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S278). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After the process of step S278 is executed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol are performed (step S279). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by a transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 Stored in the designated buffer area. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sequentially issues a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to transmit, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. When the setting in step S279 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 37 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variable display result notification command are sequentially transmitted.

  Following the setting in step S279, it is determined whether either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is on (step S280). At this time, if either the big hit flag or the small hit flag is on (step S280; Yes), the release pattern determination table 139 shown in FIG. 19 is selected and set as a use table (step S281). Subsequently, a random value MR7 for determining an open pattern is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 (step S282). Then, based on the random number MR3 for determining the release pattern extracted in step S281, the release table is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the use table set in step S280 (step S283). Thereafter, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting an open pattern notification command corresponding to the open pattern determined in step S283 (step S284). For example, when the release pattern of the release KP1-2 is determined, the setting for transmitting the release pattern notification command for notifying the release pattern of the release KP1-2 is performed. On the other hand, when the release pattern of the release KP1-3 is determined, the setting for transmitting the release pattern notification command for notifying the release pattern of the release KP1-3 is performed. Thereby, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to specify the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the two round big hit state or the small hit game state. In this embodiment, the release pattern notification command that can specify the release pattern is transmitted only when the release pattern is release KP1-2 or release KP1-3. An open pattern notification command may be transmitted to enable identification of.

  When it is determined in step S280 that both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (step S280; No), after executing the process of step S284, the value of the special figure process flag is changed as a special symbol. After updating to “2” corresponding to the process (step S285), the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 42, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S291). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S291; Yes), the big hit start production waiting time is set (step S292). For example, in the process of step S 292, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the jackpot start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S292, setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). For example, in the process of step S293, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Should be stored in. Thereafter, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S294). And the big hit start time flag provided in the game control flag setting part 152 is set to an ON state (step S294A). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S295). For example, in step S295, a process for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-shortage flag to turn it off, a process for clearing a special-figure variation number counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time-shortage state, etc. It only has to be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for the special winning opening (step S296), and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

  If the big hit flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), it is determined whether the small hit flag is on (step S297). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S297; No), a small hit start time production waiting time is set (step S298). For example, in the process of step S298, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start time production waiting time may be set in the game control process timer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S298, as in the process of step S293, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S299). For example, in step S299, a hit start designation command in which the same EXT data is set as in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” (two round big hit) in step S293, while the big hit type is “normal”. Alternatively, a hit start designation command in which EXT data different from the case of “probability change” (15 round big hit) is set is transmitted. By doing in this way, when the variable display result is “small hit”, it is possible to execute the same effect as in the case of “surprise big hit”. Further, when the variable display result is “small hit” or “surprise big hit”, it is possible to execute an effect different from the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (15 round big hit). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S300). Also, a small hitting start flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to an on state (step S300A). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step S301).

  If the small hit flag is off in step S297 (step S297; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S302). . After executing one of the processes in steps S301 and S302, it is determined whether or not to end the probability variation state or the time reduction state (step S303). For example, in the process of step S303, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the updated special figure fluctuation number count value is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not the special game state end determination value is met. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the probability variation state or the time reduction state may be terminated by clearing the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag, etc., and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the special game state end determination value, the state of the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S303 may be ended. After executing the end determination of the probability variation state or the short time state, the special symbol stop process ends. Note that the end determination based on the special figure variation count value may be performed only in the short-time state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. . Alternatively, for example, by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the probability change state end from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and referring to a probability change state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 or the like Further, it may be determined whether or not to end the probability variation state.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the pre-opening process for the big prize opening executed in step S114 of FIG. 43, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit start flag is on (step S311). Here, the big hit start flag is set to the on state in step S294A in correspondence with the big hit flag being turned on in step S291 shown in FIG. If the big hit start time flag is on in step S311 (step S311; Yes), it is determined whether or not the big hit start time effect is on standby (step S312). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 38, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit start production waiting time is Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, it is determined that the big hit start effect is waiting in response to the game control process timer value not matching a predetermined standby time elapsed determination value (eg, “0”, etc.). Corresponding to the match, it may be determined that the big hit start time production is not waiting.

  If it is waiting for the big hit start effect in step S312 (step S312; Yes), for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like (step S313), and the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is ended. To do. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big hit start effect in step S292 (step S312; No), the big hit start time flag is cleared (step S314), and the big winning opening opening number counter is cleared. (Step S315). Subsequently, an opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern determined in step S282 shown in FIG. 41 is set (step S316).

  After the process of step S316 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is waiting until the next prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step S317). As an example, in the process of step S317, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release standby end determination value. For example, it may be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next release in step S317 (step S317; Yes), the process proceeds to step S313 and the game control process timer value is updated. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step S313 is the time set as the big hit start waiting time in step S292 shown in FIG. 42, or in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. The time set as the interval time between each round.

  If it is determined in step S317 that it is not waiting for the next opening (step S317; No), the winning a prize corresponding to the opening control pattern set in step S316 and the count value in the winning a prize opening number counter. Settings are made to open the mouth (step S318). As an example, in the process of step S318, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer. The big winning opening opening time which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth is set. Also, for example, when a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the big winning opening door solenoid for opening the big winning opening is turned on. Setting to be in the state is performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the special winning opening open designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S319). After the process of step S319 is executed, the special prize opening number of times count is updated by adding 1 or the like (step S320), and the value of the special process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special prize opening opening process. After updating to “5” (step S321), the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is ended.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the special winning opening opening process executed in step S115 of FIG. 44, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a game ball has been won at the special winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step S331). If there is no game ball winning in the grand prize opening in step S331 (step S331; No), the process proceeds to step S334.

  On the other hand, if there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening in step S331 (step S331; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it (step S332). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S333). If the winning number count value is not the predetermined number (step S333; No), after the game control process timer value is decremented by 1 and updated (step S334), for example, the game control process timer value is determined to determine whether the predetermined release period has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening period has passed in accordance with whether or not the value (for example, “0” or the like) is met (step S335). At this time, if the special winning opening opening period has not elapsed (step S335; No), the special winning opening open process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S333 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step S333; Yes), or when it is determined in step S335 that the large winning opening opening period has elapsed (step S335; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined solenoid for a special prize opening door via a predetermined solenoid circuit, for example, a big prize opening door for closing the special prize opening The setting is made so that the solenoid is turned off (step S336), and the winning number count value is cleared (step S337).

  After the processing of step S337 is performed, setting for transmitting a designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S338), and the value of the special figure process flag is set after opening the big prize opening. After updating to “6”, which is a value corresponding to the process (step S339), the special winning opening open process is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 45, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S341). As an example, in the post-opening process for the big prize opening in step S116 shown in FIG. 38, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, A value is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S341, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and depending on whether or not the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value. What is necessary is just to determine whether the production waiting time at the end of the big hit has elapsed. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S341 (step S341; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S341 (step S341; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S342). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type buffer value read in step S342 is “0” corresponding to the “normal” jackpot type (step S343). At this time, if the big hit type buffer value is “0” (step S343; Yes), the setting for starting the control to the short time state is performed (step S344). As an example, in the process of step S344, the time reduction flag is set to the on state and the count initial value (for example, “100”) determined in advance corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state. May be set in the special figure fluctuation counter.

  If the big hit type buffer value is other than “0” in step S343 (step S343; No), it is determined whether or not the big hit type buffer value is “2” (step S343A). If the big hit type buffer value is not “2” (step S343A; No), the setting for starting the control to the probability variation state is performed (step S345). As an example, in the process of step S345, the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and if the big hit type buffer value is “2” (step S343A; Yes), the control to the probability variation state (no time reduction) is performed. Is set to start (step S345A). As an example, in the process of step S345, the probability variation flag is set to the on state. When the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the certain change state is determined, a predetermined count initial value corresponding to the upper limit value may be set in the special figure fluctuation number counter.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S344, S345, and S345A, the special figure process flag value is updated to “0”, which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S346), and then the big hit end process Exit.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit release pre-processing executed in step S118 of FIG. 46, first, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small hit start flag is on (step S351). Here, the small hitting start flag is set to an on state in response to the small hitting flag being turned on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the small hitting start flag is ON in step S351 (step S351; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hitting start time effect is on standby (step S352). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. 38, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the small hitting start production waiting time Is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S352, it is determined that the game is waiting for the effect at the start of the small hitting corresponding to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined standby time elapsed determination value (eg, “0”, etc.). Then, in response to the match, it may be determined that the small hit start effect is not on standby.

  If it is waiting for the small hit start effect in step S352 (step S352; Yes), for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step S353), and then the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the effect at the start of the small hit at step S292 (step S352; No), the flag at the start of the small hit is cleared (step S354) and the special winning opening opening number counter is set. Clear (step S355). Subsequently, an opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern determined in step S282 shown in FIG. 41 is set (step S356).

  After the process of step S356 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is waiting until the special winning opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step S357). As an example, in the process of step S357, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value. For example, it may be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is in the next release waiting state in step S357 (step S357; Yes), the process proceeds to step S353 and the game control process timer value is updated. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step S353 is the time set as the small hit start waiting time in step S298 shown in FIG. 42, or the processing after the small hit release in step S118 shown in FIG. The time set as the interval time between each round.

  If it is determined in step S357 that it is not waiting for the next opening (step S357; No), the winning a prize corresponding to the opening control pattern set in step S356 and the count value in the winning a prize opening number counter. Settings are made to open the mouth (step S358). As an example, in the process of step S358, a special winning prize ball apparatus 7 formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set by setting a timer initial value that is set in advance corresponding to the big winning opening opening time in the game control process timer. The big winning opening opening time which is the upper limit of the time for opening the mouth is set. Also, for example, when a solenoid drive signal for a predetermined big prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the big winning opening door solenoid for opening the big winning opening is turned on. Setting to be in the state is performed.

  Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S359). After the processing of step S359 is executed, the special prize opening number of times count is updated by adding 1 or the like (step S360), and the value of the special figure process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit opening process. After updating to “9” (step S361), the small hit pre-release process is terminated.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit release process executed in step S119 of FIG. In the small hit releasing process shown in FIG. 47, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has been won at the big winning opening, for example, by determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step S371). If there is no game ball winning in the grand prize opening in step S371 (step S371; No), the process proceeds to step S374.

  On the other hand, if there is a game ball winning in the big winning opening in step S371 (step S371; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning number count value by adding 1 (step S372). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S373). If the winning number count value is not the predetermined number (step S373; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by decrementing by 1 (step S374), for example, the game control process timer value is determined to determine whether the predetermined release period has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening period has elapsed in accordance with whether or not the value (for example, “0” or the like) is met (step S375). At this time, if the big winning opening opening period has not elapsed (step S375; No), the small hit opening process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S373 that the updated winning number count value is a predetermined number (step S373; Yes), or when it is determined in step S335 that the large winning opening opening period has elapsed (step S375; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid driving signal for a predetermined solenoid for a prize winning door via a prescribed solenoid circuit, for example, a prize winning door for closing the prize winning opening The setting is made so that the solenoid is turned off (step S376), and the winning number count value is cleared (step S377).

  After performing the process of step S377, the setting for transmitting the designation command after opening the big prize opening to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S378), and the count value of the number of big prize mouth opening is incremented by one. Update (step S379). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated big winning opening opening count value is a predetermined number (for example, twice) (step S380). If the special winning opening opening count value is not the predetermined number (step S380; No), the special figure process flag value is updated to “8” corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S380). S381), the small hit opening process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S380 that the number of times of winning the winning prize opening is a predetermined number (step S380; Yes), the special figure process flag value is used for the small hit end process. After updating the value to “10” (step S382), the small hit releasing process is terminated.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S16 of FIG. In this normal symbol process, the CPU 103 first checks whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 provided in the passage gate 41 is in an on state, so that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. It is determined whether or not (step S131). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 and the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is turned on (step S131; Yes), the process at the time of passing the gate is executed (step S132). On the other hand, when the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state (step S131; No), the process of step S132 is skipped.

  As an example of the process at the time of passing through the gate executed in step S132, the following process is executed. That is, first, whether or not the number of pending map storages, which is the number of pending data stored in the pending map storage unit provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”). Determine whether or not. At this time, if the number of stored customary drawings is an upper limit value, the current game ball detection is invalidated and the process at the time of passing the gate is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the number of stored customary drawings is less than the upper limit value, for example, the CPU 103 indicates a random number value MR6 for determining the display result of the common map from numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter. Extract numerical data. Then, the numerical data indicating the extracted random value MR6 is set as the hold data at the head of the empty entry in the usual hold storage unit. After the above-described processing at the time of passing the gate, or after it is determined in step S131 that the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is in the OFF state, the following processing is performed according to the value of the usual process flag. Each process of steps S140 to S144 is executed.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 20 starts the normal symbol game based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the normal symbol storage unit. At this time, for example, if there is pending data stored in the usual figure hold storage unit, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “1”.

  The normal symbol determination process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol determination process, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the normal symbol display result, the normal symbol display result as the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol game in the general symbol game is set to “per normal symbol” or “ A determination is made as to whether or not it is “usually lost”. At this time, for example, when one of the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag is on, the ratio that is determined to be “per normal” is higher than when both are off. The figure display result determination table 130C is referred to. As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal” than in the normal state. The mouth is likely to be in an expanded open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening. Further, in the normal symbol determination process, the universal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the universal symbol display result is also determined. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, the normal variation pattern may be determined such that the normal variation time is shorter than when both are off. This reduces the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game in the probability variation state and the short time state. The second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is likely to be in an expanded open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting winning opening.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol variation process, a setting for varying the normal symbol is performed in the general symbol game by the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol that changes based on these settings is displayed as a normal symbol display result that is a variable symbol display result of the normal symbol when the normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed. In the normal symbol variation process, the elapsed time from the start of variation of the normal symbol is measured. At this time, a determination is made as to whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the normal time fluctuation time determined in accordance with the normal time fluctuation pattern. Then, when the usual figure change time is reached, the value of the usual figure process flag is updated to “3”.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S143 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “3”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to stop and display the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol. Note that the setting for stopping and displaying the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is the value of the normal symbol process flag when the measured elapsed time reaches the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol variation process of step S142. It may be performed before updating to “3”. Further, in the normal symbol stop process, when the normal symbol display result is “per normal symbol”, for example, for driving the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory connected to the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B, for example. After performing the setting for the enlargement / release control in which the movable blade piece is tilted, such as the setting of the normal operation pattern, the value of the normal process flag is updated to “4”. At this time, for example, when either the probability variation flag or the time reduction flag is on, a normal operation pattern in which the period and the number of times of performing the expansion opening control are increased as compared with the case where both are off may be set. . As a result, in the probability variation state and the short time state, the period and the number of times that the second start winning opening is in the expanded open state are increased based on the fact that the base map display result is “per base map”, and the game ball is in the second state. It becomes easier to enter the starting prize opening. If the normal map display result is “general map loss”, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “0”.

  The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S144 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “4”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece provided in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is moved from the vertical position to the tilt position in response to the variable display result in the ordinary game being “per game”. Thus, setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the expanded open state is performed. For example, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, a drive control signal for driving the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is generated according to the setting of the ordinary electric action pattern set in the ordinary symbol stop process in step S143. You can make it. Further, in the ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the elapsed time after the ordinary electric accessory solenoid is driven and the second start winning opening is set to the open expanded state is measured, and the elapsed time is enlarged corresponding to the ordinary electric actuating pattern. A determination is made whether the opening time has been reached. When the elapsed time reaches the expansion opening period, the driving of the ordinary electric utility solenoid is stopped, and the movable wing piece is returned from the tilting position to the vertical position, so that the second start winning opening is in the expansion opening state. Set to change from normal to open state. At this time, the value of the normal process flag may be updated to “0”.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 49 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S401), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, a random number update process is executed (step S402), and numerical data indicating a random value counted by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 among various random values used for effect control is displayed by software. Update. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S403). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption occurs due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is off in step S403 (step S403; No), the process returns to step S402. On the other hand, if the timer interrupt flag is on in step S403 (step S403; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S404), and command analysis processing is executed (step S405). . In the command analysis process executed in step S405, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S405, an effect control process is executed (step S406). In this effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation such as a game effect lamp 9, and a movable member 78 such as a noticeable movable member 78 are provided. With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using the electrical component for rendering, such as the drive operation of the member, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S406 of FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of the following processes in steps S160 to S165 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example. Run.

  The fluctuation start command reception waiting process in step S160 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variation start waiting process is provided in the image display device 5 depending on whether one of the first variation start command and the second variation start command is received as the variation start command transmitted from the main board 11. This includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S161 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this decorative symbol variation setting process, the start of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the start of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various presentation operations including variable display of decorative symbols, the final decorative symbols, temporary stop symbols, production modes, etc., which are the final stop symbols, are selected according to the variation pattern and variable display results. Processing to determine is included. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, a symbol variation control pattern, a mode effect control pattern, and the like are set based on these determination results. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative symbol variation process in step S162 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, various types of symbol variation control patterns, mode effect control patterns, and the like corresponding to the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 are used. Processing for reading out the control data and performing various effects control during variable display of the decorative design is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The decorative symbol variation end process includes a process of determining whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. At this time, if it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to “4” when the variable display result specified from the hit start designation command is “big hit”. Is done. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the hit start designation command, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” in response to the variable display result being “lost”.

  The big hit control effect process in step S164 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the effect processing during the big hit control, for example, various effect control patterns corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” or the like is set, and the effect image based on the set contents is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Displaying or outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect lamps by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 9 and processing for controlling various effects in the big hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decoration LED. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” in response to, for example, receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hit control in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In the effect process during the small hit control, for example, an effect control pattern is set in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the image display device 5. Displaying sound in the area, outputting sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting sound effect signals to the sound control board 13, and playing the game effect lamp 9 and decorations by outputting electric decoration signals to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the small hit gaming state such as turning on / off / flashing the LED is included. As an example, in the effect processing during small hit control in step S165, the effect control patterns of the hit start CST2-2 and the hit control CRE1-2 shown in FIG. Reading from the pattern table 182 and setting the production control process timer. Thereafter, various settings for controlling the rendering operation may be performed in accordance with the control data read from the rendering control pattern according to the rendering control process timer value. The effect operation executed by such a setting may be an effect operation common to both the accuracy and the small hit, which may be executed even when the big hit type is “Accuracy”. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The ending effect process in step S165 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, or a voice control board 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Processing for controlling various performance operations corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state such as turning off / flashing is included. Further, in the ending effect process, setting for changing the effect mode is performed in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probable change state or the short time state. For example, when the 15-round big hit state ends after the variable display result is “big hit” for the “normal” big hit type, the display mode of the background image is set so as to be the effect mode (for example, mode J). Or the display mode of the decorative design may be changed. In addition, when the 15-round big hit state ends after the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “probable change”, the display mode of the background image is set so that the effect mode (for example, mode K) during the probability change is set. And change the display mode of decorative designs. Furthermore, when the 2nd round big hit state ends after the variable display result becomes “big hit” in the “big hit” type, or when the small hit gaming state ends after the variable display result becomes “small hit” The display mode of the background image and the display mode of the decorative design are changed so that any one of the mode A, mode B, and mode C can be achieved. As a result, after the two-round big hit state and the small hit game state are finished, a shared effect is performed, so whether or not the state is controlled to the probability variation state is controlled to an unspecified state (latent state). be able to.

  51 and 52 are flowcharts showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S161 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “losing” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (FIG. 51). Step S501). At this time, if the variable display result is “losing” (step S501; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the variation pattern designation command, the designated variation pattern sets the variable display mode of the decorative symbol to “non-reach”. It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case of "" (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, the final stop symbol determination table 160A shown in FIG. 22A is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the decorative symbol to be the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160A. Next, the final stop symbol determination table 160B shown in FIG. 22B is selected and set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-2 for determining the second final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-2, the decorative symbol to be the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 is determined by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160B. At this time, based on the combination of the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ1-2, by referring to the left / right output determination table 161 as shown in FIG. It is determined which of a plurality of types. Thereafter, the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C is selected and set. Subsequently, a random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. Then, based on the extracted random number value SR1-3 and the left / right outcome type DC1-1, the final stop symbol determination table 160C is referred to determine a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ1-3.

  In this way, in the process of step S503, referring to the final stop symbol determination tables 160A to 160C and the left / right outcome determination table 161, the decorative symbols to be the left middle right final stop symbols FZ1-1 to FZ1-3 are determined. Then, the combination of the determined decorative symbols is a reach combination, a jackpot combination, one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8, one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4, or a predetermined non-reach as shown in FIG. There is no combination.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting a reach-losing combination is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, first, the final stop symbol determination table 162A shown in FIG. 24A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value SR1-1, the same decorative symbols that become the left final stop symbol FZ2-1 and the right final stop symbol FZ2-2 are displayed. decide. Next, a final stop symbol determination table 162B shown in FIG. 24B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-3 for determining the third final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 162B based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number values SR1-3, the decorative symbols that become the left and right final stop symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 and the middle final stop symbol FZ2- The design difference from the decorative design of 3 is determined. In accordance with the symbol difference determined in this way, a decorative symbol to be the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 is determined.

  In this way, in the process of step S504, first, using the final stop symbol determination table 162A, “left” and “right” other than the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. The decorative symbols to be the left and right final stopped symbols FZ2-1 and FZ2-2 that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are determined. After that, using the final stop symbol determination table 162B, the decorative symbol that becomes the middle final stop symbol FZ2-3 and the left and right final stop symbol FZ2- in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C where the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed last. 1, the design difference with the decorative design to be FZ2-2 is determined, and the decorative design to be the middle final stop design FZ2-3 is determined according to the determined design difference.

  When the variable display result is other than “losing” in step S501 (step S501; No), the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”. Is determined (step S505 in FIG. 52). At this time, if the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit” (step S505; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data of the fluctuation pattern designation command, the designated fluctuation pattern is obtained. Special PG1-4 to Special PG1-7, Special PG2-1 and Special PG2-2, Special PH1-4 to Special PH1-7, Special PH2-1 and Special PH2-2 It is determined whether it is other than those (step S506). Here, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, special PG1-4 to special PG1-7, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PH1-4 to special PH1-7, special PH2-1 and special PH2 All the -2 variation patterns specify that a predetermined reach effect (reach effect α1 or reach effect α2) is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state. Therefore, in step S506, any of the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-4 to special PG1-7, special PG2-1, special PG2-2, special PH1-4 to special PH1-7, special PH2-1, and special PH2-2 If it is determined (step S506; Yes), the process proceeds to the process of step S504 shown in FIG. 51, and the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the reach-losing combination is determined.

  If it is determined in step S506 in FIG. 52 that the variation pattern is other than the variation patterns of special PG1-4 to special PG1-7, special PG2-1, and special PG2-2 (step S506; No), the odd chance TC1 A combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting any of TC4 is determined (step S507). As an example, in the process of step S507, the final stop symbol determination table 163C shown in FIG. 25C is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163C on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ4-1 and FZ4- that become any one of the chance chances TC1 to TC4 are obtained. 2, The combination of FZ4-3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  In step S505, when the variable display result is not “small hit” and the big hit type is not “surprise” (step S505; No), a use table for determining whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed. As shown in FIG. 26B, the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 26B is selected and set (step S508). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR5-2 for determining the promotion effect during the big hit is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S509). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR5-2, the presence / absence of jackpot promotion is determined by referring to the jackpot promotion promotion execution determination table 164B (step S510).

  Following the processing in step S510, it is determined whether or not the determination result in step S510 is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the jackpot promotion effect (step S511). At this time, if the determination result is “with promotion effect” as “promotion success” or “promotion failure” (step S511; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is selected. Determination is made (step S512). As an example, in the process of step S512, the final stop symbol determination table 163A shown in FIG. 25A is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163A based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which are any of the normal jackpot combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern. In this way, when the jackpot promotion effect is executed, the final stop symbol constituting the normal jackpot combination is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol, and the derivation display of the final stop symbol constituting the probability variable jackpot combination is prevented. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player or the like from feeling uncomfortable because the promotion effect during the big hit is executed even though the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  If the determination result is “no promotion effect” in step S511 (step S511; Yes), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination is determined (step S513). Here, in the setting of the jackpot promotion promotion execution execution determination table 164B shown in FIG. 26B, in response to the determination that the jackpot promotion promotion execution is not executed in response to the jackpot type being “probability change” When a determined value to be compared with the random number SR5-2 for determining the promotion effect execution is assigned and the jackpot type is “normal”, the determination value indicates that the promotion effect during the jackpot promotion is not executed is determined. Not assigned. Therefore, the determination result of “no promotion effect” is obtained only when the jackpot type is “probability change”. As an example, in the process of step S513, the final stop symbol determination table 163B shown in FIG. 25B is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR1-1 for determining the first final stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the final stop symbol determination table 163B on the basis of the numerical data indicating the extracted random number SR1-1, the left middle right final stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, FZ3, which become one of the probable big hit combinations, are obtained. The combination of -3 is determined as a confirmed decorative pattern.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S503 and S504 shown in FIG. 51, or after executing any of the processes of steps S507, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. 52, the slip / pseudo continuous setting process is executed. (Step S514 in FIG. 51). FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process executed in step S514. In the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process shown in FIG. 53, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a change pattern (for example, non-reach PA1−) in which the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command executes a “slip” variable display effect. 4 or normal PA2-2, super PA3-2, etc.) (step S701).

  When it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern is to execute the “slip” variable display effect (step S701; Yes), as a table for determining one of a plurality of slip patterns as a use pattern The slip pattern determination table 166 shown in FIG. 29 is selected and set (step S702). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR6 for determining the slip pattern is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S703). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR6, the slip pattern is determined as one of the slips TP1-1 to TP1-4 by referring to the slip pattern determination table 166 (step S704).

  After the slip pattern is determined in step S704, a slip temporary stop symbol is determined as a decorative symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed according to the determined slip pattern. (Step S705). For example, in the process of step S705, corresponding to the slip pattern determined in step S704, any one of the temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D at the time of slip shown in FIGS. Select as and set. That is, if the slip pattern of the slip TP1-1 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167A is selected. If the slip pattern of the slip TP1-2 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167B is selected. When the slip pattern of the slip TP1-3 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167C is selected. When the slip pattern of the slip TP1-4 is determined, the slip temporary stop symbol determination is determined. Select table 167D. Further, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR3 for determining the temporary stop symbol at the time of sliding is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, by referring to any of the selected slip temporary stop symbol determination tables 167A to 167D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR3, the right temporary stop symbol KZ1-1 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-2. Then, a decorative symbol that is one of the right temporary stop symbol 1-3 and the left temporary stop symbol KZ1-4 is determined.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the variation pattern does not execute the “slip” variable display effect (step S701; No), the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “pseudo-continuous” variable. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern (for example, non-reach PA 1-5, super PA 3-3, super PB 3-3, etc.) for executing the display effect (step S706). At this time, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S706; No), the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process ends. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect (step S706; Yes), the decorative pattern to be temporarily stopped when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is determined (step S707), and the slip / pseudo continuous setting process is terminated.

  As an example, in the process of step S707, first, the number of executions of pseudo continuous fluctuation specified from the received fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is set to a constant M. At this time, when the number of re-variations (not including the initial variation) in the variable display effect of the “pseudo train” is one variation pattern, the constant M is set to “1” and the number of re-variations is two. If it is a variation pattern, the constant M is set to “2”, and if the number of re-variations is three, the constant M is set to “3”. Subsequently, “0” is set to a variable N indicating the number of combinations of temporarily stopped symbols that have been determined. When the fluctuation pattern is non-reach PA1-5 or special PG1-2, the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168A shown in FIG. 31A is selected as the use table, and the fluctuation pattern is super PA3- 3, Super PA3-6, Super PA4-3, Super PA4-6, Super PA5-3, Super PB3-3, Super PB4-3, Super PB5-3, Special PG1-3, The pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168B shown in FIG. 31 (B) is selected as the use table. Thereafter, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-1 for determining the first pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-1, by referring to any of the selected pseudo-continuous temporary stop symbol determination tables 168A, 168B, the left that becomes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 The combination of the middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3 is determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S707 ends and the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process ends. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 120 selects the quasi-continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168C shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR4-2 for determining the second pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168C based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-2, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ3 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance points GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ3-2 and KZ3-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is updated by adding 1, and it is determined whether or not the updated variable N matches the constant M.

  If the updated variable N matches the constant M, the process of step S707 ends and the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process ends. On the other hand, if the updated variable N does not match the constant M, the effect control CPU 120 selects the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168D shown in FIG. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR4-3 for determining the third pseudo-temporary temporary stop symbol is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. Then, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168D based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR4-3, the left middle right temporary stop symbol KZ4 that becomes one of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC1 to GC8. -1, KZ4-2, and KZ4-3 are determined. At this time, the variable N is incremented by 1 and updated so that the updated variable N matches the constant M. Therefore, the process of step S707 is terminated and the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process is terminated.

  After executing the slip / pseudo-continuous setting process as described above in step S514 shown in FIG. 51, the changing promotion effect setting process is executed (step S515). FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing promotion effect setting process executed in step S515. In the changing promotion effect setting process shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 120 first has a variable display result of “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”, that is, the big hit type is “normal”. ”Or“ probability change ”, or it is determined whether or not it is applicable (step S721). At this time, if the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable variation” (step S721; No), the changing promotion effect setting processing is ended as it is. .

  When it is determined in step S721 that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” or “probable change” (step S721; Yes), FIG. The changing promotion effect execution determination table 164A shown is selected and set as a use table (step S722). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR5-1 for determining the promotion promotion execution during fluctuation is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S723). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5-1 extracted in step S723, the jackpot type is “normal” and “probability” by referring to the changing promotion promotion execution determination table 164A set in step S722. The presence or absence of the promotion effect during the change is determined according to which one of them is (step S724). At this time, if the determination result is “no promotion effect” that does not execute the changing promotion effect (step S725; No), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is a determination result of “with promotion effect” that executes the changing promotion effect in step S725 (step S725; Yes), the temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing promotion effect. Is determined (step S726), the changing promotion effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S726, as an example, the promotion effect temporary stop symbol determination table 165 shown in FIG. 28 is selected and set as a use table. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the temporary stop symbol for the promotion effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. And based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random value SR2, the temporary stop symbols FZ3-1, FZ3-2, and FZ3-3 are determined by referring to the temporary stop symbol determination table 165 during the promotion effect. The combination of the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ7-1, KZ7-2, and KZ7-3 is determined according to the symbol number of the decorative symbol.

  After executing the above-described changing promotion effect setting process in step S515 shown in FIG. 51, the mode effect setting process is executed (step S516). FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the mode effect setting process executed in step S516. In the effect setting process shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not an open pattern notification command has been received from the main board 11 (step S741). Here, when the release pattern notification command is received, the variable display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit” In this case, the production mode is any one of mode A, mode B, and mode C.

  If it is determined in step S741 that an open pattern notification command has been received (step S741; Yes), the button effect execution determination table 169 shown in FIG. 33 is selected and set as a use table (step S742). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR7 for button effect execution determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S743). Then, by referring to the button effect execution determination table 169 set in step S742 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S743, the game state is likely to change or the probability change such as the normal state or the short time state. The presence / absence of a button effect is determined according to whether the game state is other than the state (step S744).

  After executing the process of step S744, the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is selected and set as a use table (step S745). Subsequently, numerical data indicating the random number SR8 for determining the effect mode is extracted from, for example, a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S746). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR8 extracted in step S746, by referring to the effect mode determination table 170 set in step S745, the release pattern notified by the release pattern notification command and the gaming state are set. In response, the mode is determined to be one of mode A, mode B, and mode C (step S747). Note that after the effect mode is determined in step S747, the release pattern notification command may be reset.

  After the effect mode is determined in step S787, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “small hit” by, for example, reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S748). If the variable display result is “small hit” (step S748; Yes), this is a case where the common display mode is entered when the variable display result is “small hit”. In this case, the small hit flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is set to the on state (step S749). If the variable display result is not “small hit” (step S748; No), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. In this case, the small hit flag is reset to the off state (step S750). When the process of step S749 or S750 is completed, the mode effect setting process is terminated. Here, the small hit flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 indicates whether or not the transition to the common production mode is triggered when the variable display result is “small hit”, that is, the special production. This is a flag for determining whether or not the execution condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the big hit type is “surprise”, it is reset to the off state, but when the 15 round big hit game state is entered, or when the common performance mode is ended, the small hit flag is turned off. You may make it reset to a state and complete | finish the execution conditions of a special effect.

  On the other hand, if the release pattern notification command has not been received in step S741 (step S741; No), the effect control CPU 120 reads the EXT data of the variable display result notification command, for example, and the variable display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not the big hit type is “probability change” (15R probability change big hit) (step S751). When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change” (step S751; Yes), the setting for shifting the production mode to mode K is performed (step S752), and the mode production setting processing is finished. .

  If the variable display result is not “big hit” or the big hit type is not “probable change” (step S751; No), the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” (15R normal big hit). Is determined (step S753). When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “normal” (step S753; Yes), the setting for shifting the production mode to mode J is performed (step S754), and the mode production setting processing is finished. . When the variable display result is “losing” (step S753; No), the short-time state is ended and the normal state is shifted to when the special-purpose game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the short-time state is reached. It is determined whether it is timing (step S755). When it is time to end the time-short state (step S755; Yes), the setting for shifting the effect mode to the mode N is performed (step S756), and the mode effect setting process ends. In other cases (step S755; No), the mode effect setting process is finished as it is.

  After executing the above-described mode effect setting process in step S516 shown in FIG. 51, the special effect setting process is executed (step S516A). FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect setting process executed in step S516A of FIG. In the special effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” by reading, for example, EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S781). At this time, if the variable display result is not “big hit” (step S781; No), the special effect setting process is finished as it is.

  If the variable display result is “big hit” (step S781; Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S782).

  If the small hit flag is off (step S782; No), the special effect setting process is terminated. If the small hit flag is off (step S782; Yes), the mode flag is checked to determine whether or not the current effect mode is the common effect mode (mode A, mode B, mode C) ( Step S783). In this effect mode flag, for example, a value of “1” is set corresponding to the mode A determined in step S747 of FIG. 55, and “2” corresponding to the mode B determined. The value of “3” is set in response to the mode C being determined. Further, a value of “4” is set in response to the transition setting to mode K in step S752 of FIG. 55, and a value of “5” is corresponding to the transition setting in mode J in step S753. A value is set, and a value of “0” is set in response to setting to shift to mode N in step S756. In the process of step S783, it is determined whether or not the mode is the common effect mode by determining whether or not the value of the mode flag is any one of “1” to “3”.

  Based on the determinations in steps S781 to S783, it is determined whether or not an execution condition for special effects is satisfied. That is, in the common effect mode (step S783; Yes), if the small hit flag is in the on state (step S782; Yes), the mode is shifted to the common effect mode when the variable display result is “small hit”. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” (step S781; Yes), the special effect can be executed. Note that the order of determination in steps S781 to S783 is not limited to this order and may be arbitrary. Further, in step S782, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state, and if not the probability variation state, the processing may proceed to step S783. In other words, if it is not in the promiscuous state in the common effect mode, it is a case where the variable display result has been changed to the common effect mode when the result is “small hit”. It may be possible. If the small hit flag is in the on state, the process shifts to one of the common effect modes, so the determination in step S783 may be skipped.

  If the current effect mode is not the common effect mode (step S783; No), the special effect setting process is terminated. If the current effect mode is the common effect mode (step S783; Yes), it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is mode A by checking whether or not the value of the mode flag is “1”. (Step S784). If the current effect mode is mode A (step S784; Yes), a mode A special effect determination table 200A shown in FIG. 56B is set as a table for determining the special effect (step S785).

  If the current production mode is not mode A (step S784; No), it is determined whether or not the current production mode is mode B by checking whether or not the value of the mode flag is “2”. (Step S786). If the current effect mode is mode B (step S786; Yes), the mode B special effect determination table 200B shown in FIG. 56C is set as a table for determining the special effect (step S787).

  If the current effect mode is not mode B (step S786; No), the current effect mode is mode C. Therefore, a mode C special effect determination table 200C shown in FIG. 56 (D) is used as a table for determining the special effect. Is set (step S788).

  After the process of step S785, S787, or S788, for example, the variable display result is specified by reading the EXT data of the variable display result notification command (step S789). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random value SR9 for determining the special effect is extracted from a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 (step S790).

  Based on the special effect determination table set in step S785, S787 or S788, the variable display result specified in step S789, and the random value SR9 extracted in step S790, whether or not the special effect is executed, An effect pattern is determined (step S791). Thereafter, the special effect setting process is finished.

  Here, the mode A special effect determination table 200A shown in FIG. 56B indicates whether or not to execute the special effect based on the variable display result and the random value SR9 for determining the special effect. It is a table for deciding which special effect pattern of special effect A1 "or" special effect A2 "is executed. Special effect patterns “special effect A1” and “special effect A2” are special effect patterns for executing a special effect corresponding to mode A. The “special effects A1” and “special effects A2” have different effects. In the allocation of the random value SR9 in the mode A special effect determination table 200A, it is easy to execute the special effects in the order of the variable display result (big hit type) “probable big hit”> “normal big hit”> “surprise big hit”. . In addition, the variable display result is more likely to be determined as the special effect pattern of “special effect A2” than “special effect A1” in the order of “probable big hit”> “normal big hit”> “surprise big hit”. With such a setting, it is possible to indicate to the player that a more advantageous variable display result is likely to be obtained when a special effect is executed. Further, when the special effect is executed, it is indicated to the player that the variable display result is more advantageous when the special effect corresponding to the special effect pattern of the “special effect A2” is executed than the “special effect A1”. be able to. Here, when the variable display result is “ordinary big hit”, the special production is easier to be executed than in the case of “surprise big hit”, and “special production A2” is more effective than “special production A1”. Although it is easy to be determined as a special performance pattern, the reverse setting may be used. When set in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that it is easy to shift to the probable change state by a special effect. The same applies to the mode B special effect determination table 200B and the mode C special effect determination table 200C. The special effect may also be executed when the variable display result is “small hit”. When the variable display result is “small hit”, only a specific special effect (for example, special effect patterns of special effects A1, B1, and C1) may be executable.

  In addition, the mode B special effect determination table 200B shown in FIG. 56C indicates whether or not to execute the special effect based on the variable display result and the random value SR9 for determining the special effect. It is a table for deciding which special effect pattern of the effect B1 and the special effect B2 is to be executed. Special effect patterns “special effect B1” and “special effect B2” are special effect patterns for executing a special effect corresponding to mode B. The “special effects B1” and the “special effects B2” have different effects. As with the mode A special effect determination table 200A, the random value SR9 in the mode B special effect determination table 200B is also more likely to have a variable display result that is more advantageous when the special effect is executed. It is easier to obtain a variable display result that is more advantageous when a special effect corresponding to the special effect pattern of “special effect B2” is executed.

  In addition, the mode C special effect determination table 200C shown in FIG. 56C indicates whether or not to execute the special effect based on the variable display result and the random value SR9 for determining the special effect. It is a table for deciding which special effect pattern of the effect C1 and the special effect C2 is to be executed. Special effect patterns “special effect C1” and “special effect C2” are special effect patterns for executing a special effect corresponding to mode C. The “special effects C1” and “special effects C2” have different effects. As with the mode A special effect determination table 200A, the random number SR9 in the mode C special effect determination table 200C is also likely to have a variable display result that is more advantageous when the special effect is executed. It is easy to obtain a variable display result that is more advantageous when a special effect corresponding to the special effect pattern of “special effect C2” is executed.

  After executing the special effect setting process as described above in step S516A shown in FIG. 51, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S517). At this time, the effect control CPU 120, for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, the slip pattern determined in step S704 shown in FIG. 53, or the mid-change promotion determined in step S724 shown in FIG. Corresponding to the presence / absence of production, etc., one of a plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in the symbol variation control pattern table 180 shown in FIG. Further, for example, corresponding to the presence / absence of the button effect determined in step S744 shown in FIG. 55 and the effect modes determined in steps S747, S752, S754, and S756, the mode effect control pattern shown in FIG. One of a plurality of types of mode effect control patterns stored in the table 181 is selected and set as a use pattern. Also, any one of a plurality of types of special effect control patterns stored in the special effect control pattern table 183 shown in FIG. 35D is used corresponding to the special effect pattern determined in step S791 shown in FIG. Select and set as a pattern.

  Following the processing in step S517, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 corresponding to the effect control process timer setting value indicated in the symbol variation control pattern set in step S517. Is set (step S518). Then, for example, by supplying a display control command corresponding to the effect display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern to the display control unit 123, the “left” and “middle” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are provided. , The decorative symbols start to change in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, and the color symbols change in either the “left” or “right” colored symbol display areas 5A, 5B. Is set to start the variation of various symbols in the image display device 5 (step S519). Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation process (step S520), and the decorative symbol variation setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S162 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 57, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction) (step S531) and then displays the updated effect control process timer value Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the control pattern, it is determined whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532). And if it does not correspond to any timer judgment value (step S532; No), the decorative symbol variation process is terminated.

  When the timer determination value is matched in step S532 (step S532; Yes), various control data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. , One of the end codes) is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S532 match the effect control process timer value, a plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other. What is necessary is just to read control data by the process of step S533. Then, it is determined whether or not the control data read in step S533 is an end code (step S534). At this time, if it is determined that the code is not an end code (step S534; No), an effect control command process for performing a command or setting corresponding to the control data read in step S533 is executed (step S534). S535), the decorative pattern changing process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the big hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S536). Then, the value of the decorative symbol process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol variation end process (step S537), and then the decorative symbol variation processing is terminated. When a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, when it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code, “left”, “middle”, “right” ”In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, temporarily stop display is performed so as to display the fluctuation variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol stop command is received in the decorative symbol variation end process in step S163 shown in FIG. In response to this, the decorative design may be stopped completely.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S535 of FIG. In the effect control command process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the type of control data read out in the process of step S533 shown in FIG. 57 from display control data, audio control data, and lamp control data. (Step S761). Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the control data specified in step S761 is display control data (step S762).

  If it is determined in step S762 that the data is display control data (step S762; Yes), a display control command created according to the read display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 (step S763). If it is determined in step S762 that the data is not display control data (step S762; No), or after the process of step S763 is executed, is the type of control data specified in step S761 audio control data? It is determined whether or not (step S764). At this time, if the type of the control data is voice control data (step S764; Yes), a command (sound effect signal) indicating the voice data created according to the read voice control data is sent from the output port included in the I / O 125. By transmitting to the audio control board 13 (step S765), audio corresponding to the audio control data read from the effect control pattern is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. If it is determined in step S764 that the data is not voice control data (step S764; No), or after executing the process of step S765, the type of control data specified in step S761 is lamp control data. It is determined whether or not (step S766).

  If it is determined in step S766 that the data is lamp control data (step S766; Yes), an instruction (lighting signal) indicating lamp data created according to the read lamp control data is output included in the I / O 125. By transmitting from the port to the lamp control board 14 (step S767), the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 corresponding to the lamp control data read from the effect control pattern is performed. If it is determined in step S766 that the data is not lamp control data (step S766; No), or after the process of step S769 is executed, the effect control command process is terminated.

  Next, a specific example of the rendering operation by displaying various rendering images centering on the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 will be described. The effect control board 12 responds to the reception of the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11 based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, for example, The control CPU 120 supplies a predetermined display control command to the display control unit 123 in step S763 shown in FIG. 58, for example, so that “left”, “middle”, “right” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 are used. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of the decorative symbol is started.

  Hereinafter, a specific example in the case where the variable display result of the decorative design is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “losing” will be described. FIG. 59 shows the variable display of “slip” when the variable display effect is not executed among the cases where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach”, or when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. The example of a display operation in case a production is performed is shown. For example, when the variation pattern of the non-reach PA1-1 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variable display effect as shown in FIGS. 59 (C1) and (C2) is not executed, and the variation of the non-reach PA1-4. When the pattern is designated, the “slip” variable display effect as shown in FIGS. 59 (E1) to (E4) is executed, and when the non-reach PA1-5 variation pattern is designated, FIG. 59 (D1 ) To (D6) as shown in FIG. In FIG. 59 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 59B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  When the variable display effect of “slip” and “pseudo-run” is not executed, or when the variable display effect of “slip” is executed, the final display shown in FIG. 22A is performed in step S503 shown in FIG. By referring to the stop symbol determination table 160A, in response to the determination of the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1, the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. A stop display will be performed. If the decorative pattern variable display mode is “non-reach”, the non-reach PA1-4 variation pattern in which the “slip” variable display effect is executed is shown in FIG. Since only the slip TP1-1 is always determined and the variable display effect of “slip” is executed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R at a high speed, the “left” decorative symbol display is executed. The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the area 5L are not changed by the variable display effect of “slip”. When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is determined as the left final stop symbol FZ1-1 in the process of step S503 shown in FIG. Based on the stop symbol FZ1-1, referring to the pseudo continuous temporary stop symbol determination table 168A shown in FIG. 31A in step S707 shown in FIG. 53, the combination of decorative symbols constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eye GC6 is determined. Corresponding to the determination as the left middle right temporary stop symbols KZ2-1, KZ2-2, and KZ2-3, the decorative symbol stop display as shown in FIG. 59 (B) is performed.

  Thereafter, when the variable display effects of “slip” and “pseudo ream” are not executed, as an example, the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R as shown in FIG. 59 (C1). After the decorative symbol to be displayed is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 59 (C2). After the display), the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed (final stop display). At this time, the final decorative symbol shown in FIG. 22B is displayed in step S503 shown in FIG. 51 as the final decorative symbol which is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R or the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. By referring to the determination table 160B, or by referring to the final stop symbol determination table 160C shown in FIG. 22C together with the left / right outcome determination table 161 shown in FIG. 23, the right final stop symbol FZ1-2 and the middle final stop It is determined as symbol FZ1-3.

  On the other hand, when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 59 (D1), the number “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. After the decorative symbol to be displayed is stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. 59 (D2). Display), the decorative symbol that becomes the pseudo consecutive chance GC6 is stopped and displayed. At this time, for example, temporary stop display such as decorative pattern fluctuation display may be performed, and then the decorative symbols may be changed again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R as shown in FIG. 59 (D3). . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIGS. 59 (D4) to (D6), decorative symbols indicating the numbers “6”, “7”, and “4” in a predetermined order such as “left” → “right” → “middle”. Are sequentially displayed in a stop (temporary stop display), and then the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped (final stop display).

  When the “slip” variable display effect is executed, as an example, as shown in FIG. 59 (E1), the decorative symbol indicating the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. After (temporary stop display), as shown in FIG. 59 (E2), the decorative symbols are re-varied at high speed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (E3), the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is changed so that the decorative symbol indicating the numeral “7” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (E1), the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is, for example, the right final stop symbol FZ1- determined in step S503 shown in FIG. 2 is determined by referring to the slip temporary stop symbol determination table 167A shown in FIG. 30A in step S705 shown in FIG. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 59 (E4), after the decorative symbol indicating the number “4” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C, the non-reach combination is confirmed. The decorative design is stopped (final stop display).

  60 to 62 show display operation examples when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is other than “surprise”. In FIG. 60 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 60B, the decorative symbol indicating the number “6” is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L.

  And, for example, when a variable display effect of “slip” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA4-2, as shown in FIG. 60 (C1) to (C3), After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbols are changed again in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R and then stopped and displayed. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is performed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Further, when a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, such as when the variation pattern is Super PA 4-3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 60 (D1) to (D5). An effect display in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo continuous variation) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done. Thereafter, the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It reaches the reach state.

  After reaching the reach state as shown in FIG. 60 (C3) or FIG. 60 (D5), for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the variation speed of the decorative pattern in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C Decreases. For example, when the variation pattern is any one of normal PA2-5 to normal PA2-8, “6” is displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C as shown in FIG. A “normal” reach effect that is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R having the numbers “left” and “right” is performed. In the example shown in FIG. 61 (B), the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in correspondence with the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, but the variable display result is “lost”. In this case, for example, an effect image indicating that the number “5” is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed, and then the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C “ The decorative decorations that constitute the reach-losing combination are displayed by, for example, stopping display of decorative symbols other than the numbers indicating “6” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, such as displaying the decorative symbols of the numbers indicating “5”. It is only necessary to stop the display of the symbols and end the variable display of the decorative symbols. When any one of reach production α1 to reach production α3, reach production β1, and reach production β2 is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. The fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern at is increased again, and various reach effects are displayed.

  For example, in the reach effect β1, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds after the character image CH2 as shown in FIG. 61 (D) is displayed. When the reach effect α1 is one of the reach effect α3, the character image CH1 as shown in FIG. 61 (E) is displayed, and then the reach effect display as shown in FIG. 61 (F) proceeds. To do. Then, in the reach effect α1, for example, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the first stage effect display appears. In the example shown in FIG. 61 (G), in response to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed, but the variable display result is “lost”. In such a case, the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed, and the variable display of decorative symbols may be terminated. On the other hand, in the reach effect α2 and the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 (H) and (I), the process proceeds to the second stage effect display. On the other hand, in the reach effect β2, after the character image CH3 as shown in FIG. 61 (J) is displayed, the corresponding reach effect display proceeds.

  When the second stage effect display progresses as shown in FIG. 61 (I), if the reach effect α2 is reached, for example, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern to be displayed appears. When the variable display result is “losing”, for example, as shown in FIG. 62B, the displayed decorative symbols are not changed, and the fixed decorative symbols constituting the reach-losing combination are stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to finish the variable display of a decoration design. On the other hand, in the reach effect α3, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62B to 62D, the process proceeds to the third stage effect display (also referred to as “relief effect”). Then, a decorative pattern that is stopped (temporarily stopped) in the third stage of effect display appears. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S724 shown in FIG. 54 that the changing promotion effect is not executed, the temporarily stopped display decorative symbol is used as it is as the final stop symbol as shown in FIG. Stopped display (final stop display) as a confirmed decorative pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the changing promotion effect, after temporarily displaying the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination as shown in FIG. 62 (F), FIG. As shown in Fig. 5, the same pattern is changed again in the state where the same decorative symbols are aligned in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the big hit type being “probable change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the decorative design displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. There is a case where a success promotion effect during change is performed in which a fixed decorative symbol which is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. If the promotion promotion effect during variation is executed, after performing the re-variation of the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 62 (G), for example, as in FIG. 62 (F), the normal jackpot combination is confirmed. What is necessary is just to stop-display a decorative design.

  FIG. 63 shows a display operation example when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and when the variable display result is “small hit”. In FIG. 63 (A), for example, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R for “left”, “middle”, and “right” in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game. The fluctuation starts. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers “1”, “5”, and “3” are sequentially stopped in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the display (temporary stop display), the confirmed decorative pattern that becomes the chance of success TC1 is stopped (final stop display). Then, in step S744 shown in FIG. 55, it is determined that the button effect is not executed, and when it is determined in step S747 that the mode A effect mode is determined, for example, as shown in FIG. An effect image YH11 is displayed to notify the transition to a special effect mode such as A mode.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S744 shown in FIG. 55 that the button effect is to be executed, and in step S747, it is determined that the effect mode of mode B is determined, for example, the step shown in FIG. In accordance with the display control data read from the mode effect control pattern CYP2-2 determined in the process of S517, an effect image YH12 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 30 is displayed as shown in FIG. And when a player operates the operation button 30 within a predetermined period and the operation detection signal transmitted to the production | presentation control board 12 turns into an ON state according to it, as shown to FIG. 63 (F), for example An effect image YH13 is displayed to notify the transition to a special effect mode such as the B mode. On the other hand, when the operation button 30 is not operated within the predetermined period, the effect image YH12 is erased as shown in FIG. 63 (E), for example, and the button effect ends.

  FIGS. 64 to 66 show display operation examples of special effects executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. In FIG. 64 (A), for example, in response to the start of variation of special symbols in the special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The fluctuation starts. When the variable display result is “small hit”, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), “1”, “5”, “3” in a predetermined order of “left” → “right” → “middle”. After the decorative symbols indicating the numbers are sequentially stopped and displayed (temporary stop display), the confirmed decorative symbol that becomes the chance of success TC1 is stopped and displayed (final stop display). When the mode A effect mode is determined in step S747 in FIG. 55, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), it is notified that the mode A is shifted to the common effect mode.

  During variable display in the A mode thus shifted, it is displayed that the mode is A as shown in FIG. In the variable display in the A mode, when the special effect pattern of the special effect A1 is determined in step S791 of FIG. 56, the character TC1 corresponding to the special effect pattern of the special effect A1 is displayed as shown in FIG. A special effect to be displayed is executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 64 (F), the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. As a result, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the numbers “6” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C are “left” and “right”. Are displayed together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (temporary stop display), and the decorative symbols constituting the normal jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

  65, the display operations of FIGS. 65A to 65D are the same as those of FIGS. 64A to 64D. In the variable display in the A mode shown in FIG. 65 (D), when the special effect pattern of the special effect A2 is determined in step S791 in FIG. 56, the special effect of the special effect A2 as shown in FIG. 65 (E). A special effect for displaying the character TC2 corresponding to the pattern is executed. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (F), the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” are aligned in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display). As a result, the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the numbers “6” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C are “left” and “right”. Are displayed together with the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R (temporary stop display), and the decorative symbols constituting the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. Here, for example, when it is decided in step S724 shown in FIG. 54 to execute the changing promotion effect, each of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed and changed again. Then, when the changing promotion effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (I), the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stopped are changed again. Later, the effect of successful promotion during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that will be a promising big hit combination.

  As shown in FIG. 56B, in the setting of the mode A special effect determination table 200A, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the special effect pattern of the special effect A2 is more easily determined than the special effect A1. It was. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 65, when the special effect corresponding to the special effect A2 is executed, it is likely to be “probable big hit”.

  66, the display operations of FIGS. 66A and 66B are the same as those of FIGS. 64A and 64B. Then, when the mode B effect mode is determined in step S747 in FIG. 55, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), it is notified that the mode is shifted to the B mode common effect mode.

  During variable display in the B mode thus shifted, it is displayed that the mode is the B mode as shown in FIG. In the variable display in the B mode, when the special effect pattern of the special effect B2 is determined in step S791 in FIG. 56, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L are displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 66 (F), after the decorative symbols indicating the number “6” in 5R are displayed together and stopped (temporarily stopped), the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state. In addition, a special effect for displaying the character TC3 corresponding to the special effect pattern of the special effect B2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 66 (G), the number indicating “6” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C is aligned with the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and is stopped (temporary). Stopped display), and decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination are stopped and displayed. Here, for example, when it is decided in step S724 shown in FIG. 54 to execute the changing promotion effect, each of “left”, “middle”, and “right” as shown in FIG. 66 (H). In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed and changed again. Then, in the case where the fluctuating promotion effect is executed in response to the jackpot type being “probable change”, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), the decorative design displayed temporarily stopped is changed again. Later, the effect of successful promotion during change is performed to stop and display the confirmed decorative symbol that will be a promising big hit combination.

  As described above, the special effect in the mode B shown in FIG. 66 is different from the special effect in the mode A shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 by changing the display timing of the character image. By doing so, the production becomes diverse and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in FIG. 56C, in the setting of the mode B special effect determination table 200B, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the special effect pattern of the special effect B2 is more easily determined than the special effect B1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66, when the special effect corresponding to the special effect B2 is executed, it is likely to be “probable big hit”.

  Although a display example of the special effect in mode C is not shown here, the display timing of the character image is different from the special effect in mode A and mode B, the character image to be displayed is different, the background image is It is only necessary to execute a different special performance. Further, the presentation mode may be made different by changing the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the moving operation of the movable member, and the like.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of the release pattern and the effect mode and the ratio (probability change latency) at which the gaming state has shifted to the probability change state.

  As an example, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, when the gaming state is in the probability changing state (the probability changing state is latent), FIG. In the process of step S747 shown, the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to, so that the mode A and the mode B are determined as the effect mode at a ratio of 3 to 7, respectively. On the other hand, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability changing state such as the normal state or the short time state (probability changing). When the state is not latent), the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the processing of step S747 shown in FIG. It is determined by the ratio.

  As a result, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2 is performed, a notification that the mode is changed to the A mode effect mode is performed in the next change in decorative pattern. In this case, the probability variation latency is 30% as shown in FIG. On the other hand, after the variable winning operation is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, a notification that the mode is changed to the B mode effect mode in the next decorative symbol change is issued. If it is performed, the probability variation latency is 70% as shown in FIG. 67 (C).

  As another example, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3, when the gaming state is in the probability changing state (the probability changing state is latent), In the process of step S747 shown in 55, the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to, so that the mode A and the mode B are determined as the effect mode at a ratio of 7 to 3, respectively. On the other hand, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability changing state such as the normal state or the short time state (probability changing). When the state is not latent), the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the process of step S747 shown in FIG. It is determined by the ratio.

  As a result, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 is performed, a notification that the mode is changed to the A mode effect mode is performed in the next decorative symbol variation. In this case, the probability variation latency is 70% as shown in FIG. On the other hand, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 is performed, a notification that the mode is changed to the B mode effect mode in the next decorative symbol change is issued. When performed, the probability variation latency is 30% as shown in FIG. 67 (D).

  As yet another example, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2, when the gaming state is in a certain change state (the probability changing state is latent) In the process of step S747 shown in FIG. 55, the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to, so that the mode C is not determined as the effect mode, while the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. When the gaming state is other than the probability variation state (the probability variation state is not hidden), the mode C may be determined as the effect mode. On the other hand, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3, when the gaming state is in the probability changing state (the probability changing state is latent), In the process of step S747 shown in FIG. 55, the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to, so that the mode C may be determined as the effect mode, while the gaming state is the normal state or the short time state. When the gaming state is other than the probability variation state (the probability variation state is not hidden), the mode C is not determined as the effect mode.

  As a result, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2 is performed, a notification that the transition to the C mode effect mode is made in the next change in decorative pattern. In this case, the probability variation latency is 0%. On the other hand, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 is performed, a notification that the transition to the C mode effect mode is made in the next decorative symbol change. If done, the probability variation latency is 100%.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a variable display result “in the common effect mode when the variable display result is“ small hit ”and the mode is shifted to the common effect mode. Special effects such as those shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 can be executed during variable display other than “losing”. By executing such special effects in the common effect mode when the variable display result is “small hit” and the game is shifted to the common effect mode, the player's attention to the effect increases, and the game The interest of will improve.

  According to the setting of the first special figure display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 9A and the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B, the first special symbol display device 4A. The variable display result in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is more than the ratio that the variable display result is “small hit” in the special figure game using the first special figure by The percentage of “small hits” was low. With such a setting, it is possible to change the game depending on which special symbol display device performs variable display, and to change the proportion of transition to the common effect mode, The interest of will improve.

  Further, in the setting of the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer (fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value) is “1” (the first special symbol display device 4A uses the first special symbol display device 4A). When a special figure game using a figure is executed), a decision value is assigned to the big hit types of “normal”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”, while the value of the variable special figure designation buffer is “2” (When the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is executed), the decision value is assigned to the big hit types of “normal” and “probability change” (the two round big hit state becomes “ The decision value for “Crash” is assigned to “Changing”, which is a big hit state for 15 rounds). In this way, it is possible to change the degree of expectation as to which specific game state is controlled depending on which special symbol display device executes variable display, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in the above embodiment, since the second special symbol display device 4B is variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol display device 4A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is likely to be in an expanded and open state. Then, a game ball wins the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, and the frequency of variable display on the second special symbol display apparatus 4B increases. In such a case, if “small hit” appears at the same rate as when variable display in the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, the player can grasp that the player is in a probable change state. The appearance rate per unit time of “small hits” increases, which causes discomfort to the player. In addition, since the effect of mode transition is frequently performed due to the “small hit”, the time efficiency of the game during the probability change state is deteriorated. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the second special symbol display device 4B, the rate at which the variable display result is “small hit” or “surprise big hit” is lowered, the frequency of mode transition effects is lowered, and the probability changing state is in progress. To improve the time efficiency of games.

  Also, special effects corresponding to each common effect mode, such as the special effects in mode A shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 and the special effects in mode B shown in FIG. 66, can be executed. The interest of will improve.

  As shown in FIG. 56B, in the setting of the mode A special effect determination table 200A, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the special effect pattern of the special effect A2 is more easily determined than the special effect A1. It was. As shown in FIG. 56C, in the setting of the mode B special effect determination table 200B, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the special effect pattern of the special effect B2 is more easily determined than the special effect B1. It was. As shown in FIG. 56D, in the setting of the mode C special effect determination table 200C, when the big hit type is “probable change”, the special effect pattern of the special effect C2 is more easily determined than the special effect C1. It was. In this way, it is possible to indicate to the player whether or not it is easy to shift to a probable state depending on which special effect is executed, so that the player becomes more focused on the effect and the interest of the game is improved. To do.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, the game medium has passed through the starting area (for example, the processing of steps S203 to S209 has been executed based on the determination of Yes in step S201 and the determination of No in step S202, Alternatively, based on Yes determination in step S210 and No determination in step S211, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, etc.) that can be identified based on the processing of steps S212 to S218, etc. ) In a variable display device (for example, the image display device 5), and the variable display result of the identification information is a predetermined display result (for example, a big hit symbol or a final stop symbol that is a big hit combination). Specific gaming states that are advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot games) A game machine (such as a pachinko machine 1) that is controlled by a game machine (such as a pachinko machine 1) that can be opened in a manner in which the game medium can be won, such as a special variable winning ball apparatus 7 and the like. Whether to control to a state, whether to shift to a high-probability state with a high probability of being determined to control to the specific gaming state, and whether to control to a special gaming state different from the specific gaming state , Predetermining means for determining the opening pattern of the variable winning device when controlling to the special gaming state before the variable display result of the identification information is derived and displayed (e.g., the CPU 103 performs the processing of steps S238 and S239, Alternatively, after executing the processes of steps S245 and S246, the part for executing the processes of steps S248 and S249, And the like, and whether or not it is controlled to the high-probability state based on the decision to control to the special gaming state by the pre-determining means. An effect mode determining means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S747) for determining to execute any one of a plurality of kinds of effect modes as an effect mode for executing the effect, and the prior determination means A game state control for executing a control for opening the variable prize-winning device in an opening pattern determined by the pre-determining means after displaying a special display result based on the decision to control to the special gaming state by Control by the means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S114 to S120) and the gaming state control means is started. After that, effect mode transition control means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S519) for performing control to shift to the effect mode determined by the effect mode determination means, and the gaming state control Even after the control by the means is completed, the game state continuation control means (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S314, S315, and S120) that performs control to continue without changing the probability state immediately before the control to the special gaming state is started. The effect mode determining means determines the effect mode at a different rate depending on whether the high-probability state is controlled and the type of the open pattern (for example, a part that executes processing). In step S747, the CPU 103 refers to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. The production mode is determined to be one of the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode at a different rate depending on whether the type of the open pattern is the open KP1-2 or the open KP1-3 depending on whether or not it is controlled to the strange state) .

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment further includes operation means (for example, the operation button 30) that can be operated by the player, and the effect mode transition control means operates the operation means by the player. On the condition that the effect has been made, control for shifting the effect mode is performed (for example, a part for performing control to display the effect images shown in FIGS. 62A to 62D and 62F).

  Further, the effect mode determination means determines the effect that prompts the operation at a higher rate when the high probability state is controlled than when the high probability state is not controlled (for example, the effect control 120 is Step S744 is executed).

  Reach determination means for determining whether or not the variable display state of the identification information is set to a predetermined reach state based on the determination that the prior determination means does not control the specific gaming state. For example, the CPU 103 determines the variable display pattern type of the identification information as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result by the prior determination unit and the reach determination unit. Variable display pattern type determination means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S262, S268, and S269 and then executes the processes in steps S270 and S271) and the variable display pattern type determination means. The identification information from among the variable display patterns included in the specified variable display pattern type It includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern (e.g. CPU103 and portions for performing the process of step S272~S274), the.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect modes include a specific effect mode (for example, an effect mode of mode C) that is determined only when the high probability state is controlled.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to be in a probable change state by referring to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 in step S747 shown in FIG. The effect mode is determined to be one of the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode at a different ratio depending on whether the type of the open pattern is the open KP1-2 or the open KP1-3. As a result, in a state in which it is difficult to determine whether or not it is controlled to the probability variation state, the probability variation state can be suggested by a combination of the opening pattern and the production mode, and the player has an expectation that the probability variation state is controlled. As a result of being able to play a game, the game interest can be improved.

  For this reason, it becomes difficult for the player to make a judgment at the end of the game, and the game will be continued. More specifically, a player who only notices that there are multiple types of open patterns assumes that the probability variation latencies are different only by the open pattern, and in spite of the fact that the probability variation latency is actually low, Will continue. Furthermore, a player who has only noticed that there are multiple types of production modes will assume that the probability variation latency is different depending only on the production mode, and will continue to play the game even though the probability variation latency is actually low. It will be. In addition, the attachment of the player to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the probability variation state is hidden can be improved. More specifically, a player who notices that the probability variation latency varies depending on the combination of the release pattern and the production mode, and starts a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has determined that the probability variation state is latent. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, when the button effect is executed, it is notified that the effect mode shifts on condition that the operation button 30 is operated within a predetermined period by the player. As a result, the player's willingness to participate can be stimulated, and the gaming interest can be further improved.

  Furthermore, such a button effect is executed at a higher rate when the gaming state is the probability variation state than when the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability variation state such as the normal state or the short time state. In this way, the operation of the operation button 30 is set as a condition for notifying the transition to the effect mode, so that the player can have an expectation that the probability variation state is hidden, and further, the operation button 30 can be operated. By operating within a predetermined period, it is possible to know whether or not the probability variation state is latent.

  After determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 11, 13, 15, and 16, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 uses the variation pattern type shown in FIG. A variation pattern is determined using A), (B), and the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Thereby, when adding the variation pattern type or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determined value in the variation pattern type determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. In addition, when adding a detailed variation pattern or changing the occurrence rate, it is only necessary to change the setting of the determination value in the variation pattern determination table, so that the setting time can be shortened. That is, since the determination ratio of the variation pattern type and the determination ratio of the variation pattern can be set separately, the design change related to the variation pattern type and the distribution of the variation pattern can be easily performed.

  After the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 is performed, in the next change in decorative design, notification is made to shift to the C mode effect mode, The probability variation latency is 100%. As described above, since the certain effect mode is executed, it is determined that the probability variation state is latent, so that the player's attention can be further attracted to the combination of the release pattern and the effect mode. As a result, the game entertainment can be further improved.

  In the common figure display result determination table 130C shown in FIG. 9C, the common figure fluctuation times TH3 and TH4 corresponding to when the probability variation flag is on, and the common figure fluctuation times TH1 corresponding to when the probability variation flag is off. , TH2 is set shorter. With this setting, when the probability variation flag is on corresponding to the probability variation state being latent, the probability variation flag is off compared to when the probability variation flag is off corresponding to the probability variation state not latent. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the tilt control is performed so that the game ball easily wins the second start winning opening.

  Further, the tilt control time TK2 corresponding to when the probability variation flag is on is set longer than the tilt control time TK1 corresponding to when the probability variation flag is off. With this setting, when the probability variation flag is on corresponding to the probability variation state being latent, the second start is performed more than when the probability variation flag is off corresponding to the probability variation state not latent. It is possible to make it easier for game balls to enter the winning opening.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, a decorative lamp (or LED) that is turned on when the variable display result is “small hit” is provided, and if the decorative lamp is watched, it can be specified that the variable display result is “small hit”. Good. By doing this, it is found that the variable display result is “small hit”, and when the variable display result is “big hit”, a premier effect such as a special effect (for example, a specific condition is set) (If it is not established, it is impossible to see the production), so the range of production is widened and the entertainment of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the variable display result is “surprise big hit” or “small hit”, the mode is shifted to the common effect mode. And, when the variable display result became “big hit” during the common production mode that shifted to when the variable display result became “small hit”, the special effect was executed. It is impossible to specify whether or not the game is in the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state corresponding to the “normal big hit” (third specific game state) or “probability big hit” (second specific game state) ( (Or difficult) When the variable display result becomes “hit” during the common effect mode when the variable display result becomes “normal jackpot”, the special effect is given. You may make it perform.

  Also, the special effects in the above embodiment are effects that display characters for special effects (notice effects) during variable display as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, and reach effects as shown in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to such an effect. For example, it may be a button effect that operates the operation button 30, or may be a step-up effect that is composed of a plurality of steps, and the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit or a probable big hit as the step progresses. As the special effect, a variable display effect such as “pseudo ream” may be executed, or a specific reach effect or a promotion effect may be performed by the special effect.

  In addition, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. 9B, the determination value is assigned to the small hit determination value data in which the variable display result is “small hit”. In the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B without assigning the determined value, the variable display result may not be “small hit”. Further, in the setting of the big hit type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) is “2”, it is determined that “surprise” is not decided. The determination value may be assigned to “Accuracy”.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the end timing of the common performance mode is not particularly set (end by shifting to mode J, mode K, or mode N). The common effect mode may be ended at a predetermined timing. For example, the main board 11 may be terminated when a predetermined fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command for executing a specific reach production) is sent from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. Alternatively, the display may end when a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) of variable display is executed after the transition to the common effect mode, or a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) of variable display is executed. It may be determined whether or not to end. When determining whether or not to end, when the gaming state is in a probable variation state, the common performance mode may be made easier to continue than in the normal state or the short time state.

  In the above embodiment, after the opening pattern of the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 and the decorative symbols constituting the odd chance TC1 to TC4 are stopped and displayed, the transition is made at the start of the first variation of the decorative symbols. The explanation has been made on the assumption that the probability variation state is hidden by the combination with the production mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and suggests that the probability variation state is hidden by the combination of the open pattern and, for example, the movement and expression of the character image synthesized and displayed with the decorative design. You may do it. In this way, when suggesting a latent state of probability change, only the character image synthesized and displayed on a specific decorative pattern among the decorative patterns of “left”, “middle”, and “right” can move or change its facial expression. do it.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that one special variable winning ball apparatus 7 that forms a big winning opening is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of, for example, two special variable winning ball devices 7 (Attacker 1 and Attacker 2) may be provided.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of the release pattern and the effect mode in such a modification and the ratio (probability change latency) at which the gaming state has shifted to the probability change state.

  As an example, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-2 that opens the attacker 1 after the attacker 1 is opened, the gaming state becomes a certain change state. If it is determined that the probability variation state is latent, the effect mode determination table corresponding to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the process of step S747 shown in FIG. Mode A and mode B are determined at a ratio of 3 to 7, respectively. On the other hand, when the variable winning operation is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-2, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability changing state such as the normal state or the short time state (probability changing). When the state is not latent), in the process of step S747 shown in FIG. 55, the effect mode determination table corresponding to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. B is determined at a ratio of 7 to 3, respectively.

  As a result, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-2 is performed, a notification that the mode is changed to the A mode effect mode is performed in the next change in decorative pattern. In this case, the probability variation latency is 30% as shown in FIG. On the other hand, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-2 is performed, a notification that the transition to the B-mode effect mode is made in the next decorative symbol change. If it is performed, the probability variation latency is 70% as shown in FIG.

  As another example, when the variable winning action is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-3 that opens the attacker 2 and then opens the attacker 1, the gaming state is a certain change state. When the probability change state is hidden (in the probability variation state), the effect mode determination table corresponding to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. 34 is referred to in the process of step S747 shown in FIG. Mode A and mode B are determined at a ratio of 7 to 3, respectively. On the other hand, when the variable winning operation is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-2, the gaming state is a gaming state other than the probability changing state such as the normal state or the short time state (probability changing). When the state is not latent), in the process of step S747 shown in FIG. 55, the effect mode determination table corresponding to the effect mode determination table 170 shown in FIG. B is determined at a ratio of 3 to 7, respectively.

  As a result, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-3 is performed, a notification that the mode is shifted to the effect mode of the A mode is performed in the next variation of the decorative pattern. In this case, the probability variation latency is 70% as shown in FIG. On the other hand, after the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP2-3 is performed, a notification that the transition to the B-mode effect mode is made in the next decorative symbol change. When performed, the probability variation latency is 30% as shown in FIG. 68 (D).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit gaming state based on the decision that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the decision that the variable display result is “small hit” In the small hit game state based on the fact that has been made, it has been described that the round game is executed twice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the round game is arbitrary. For example, it may be 15 times as in the case where the jackpot type is determined as “normal” or “probable change”. And may be seven times.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the release pattern is notified from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 side by the release pattern notification command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the release pattern may be notified by a change pattern designation command or a variable display result notification command.

  In the above embodiment, when the variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-2 or the opening KP1-3 is performed, any one of the effect modes of the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode It has been described that the notification to the effect of shifting to is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification that the effect mode is shifted may be performed after the next change of the decorative design after the execution of the variable winning operation. In this case, for example, a buffer value corresponding to the release pattern determined in step S283 in FIG. 41 is set in the release pattern buffer, and whether the release pattern buffer value is “0” in step S279. Determine whether or not. If the open pattern buffer value is other than “0”, the variable display result in the previous special figure game is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”. For example, the setting for transmitting the release pattern notification command corresponding to the release pattern buffer value may be performed. For example, when the release pattern buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the release pattern notification command for notifying the release pattern of the release KP1-2 is performed. On the other hand, when the release pattern buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the release pattern notification command for notifying the release pattern of the release KP1-3 is performed. Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, it is possible to specify the opening pattern of the big winning opening in the previous two round big hit state or the small hit game state.

  In addition, the suggestion of the probability variation latency may be performed step by step. For example, after a variable winning operation is performed according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3, before the next decoration pattern changes, once suggests a high probability variation latency of 70%, and then When changing to the A mode effect mode when the decorative pattern changes, a higher probability variation latency of 90% is suggested, and when changing to the B mode effect mode, before the change. A probability variation probability of 10% lower than the suggested value may be suggested. In addition, when a variable winning operation according to the opening control pattern corresponding to the opening pattern of the opening KP1-3 is performed, a low probability variation latency rate of 30% is suggested once before the next decorative symbol change. Then, when changing to the B-mode production mode when the decorative design changes, an extremely high probability variation latency of 90% is suggested, and when changing to the A-mode production mode, A low probability of 10% probability variation latency may be suggested.

  In the above embodiment, when the button effect is executed, when the operation of the operation button 30 is performed by the player within a predetermined period, the probability change latency is notified by notifying that the mode is changed to the special effect mode. When the button operation is not performed, it is described that the button effect is terminated without performing such notification, that is, without suggesting the probability variation latency. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the operation button 30 is not operated by the player within a predetermined period, the probability variation latency is lower than when the operation button 30 is operated. May be suggested. In the example shown in FIG. 63, when the operation button 30 is not operated within a predetermined period, the mode is changed to the B mode effect mode instead of the A mode effect mode determined in step S747 shown in FIG. By informing the effect, 30% lower than the probability variation latency 70% notified when the operation button 30 is operated may be suggested.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described, but the present invention is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine provided with one special symbol display device. Can be applied.

  The determination of the slip pattern or the pseudo-continuous pattern may be performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for designating the slip pattern or pseudo-continuous pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side together with the variation pattern may be prepared. Alternatively, an effect control command for designating a slip pattern or a pseudo-continuous pattern may be prepared separately from the variation pattern designation command.

  Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect may be performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 or the like. In this case, a variation pattern designation command for designating a different variation pattern may be prepared in accordance with the presence / absence of the promotion effect during variation determined on the main board 11 side. Or you may prepare the effect control command which designates the presence or absence of a change promotion effect during a change separately from a change pattern designation | designated command.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the final stop symbol in steps S503 and S504 shown in FIG. 51, and steps S507, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. A slip / pseudo-continuous setting process is executed in step S514, a changing promotion effect setting process is executed in step S515, a mode effect setting process is executed in step S516, and an effect control pattern in step S517 In the above description, it is assumed that the contents of control of various performance operations are determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control contents of various rendering operations are shared and determined by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided to control the rendering operations. It may be.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 via the effect control board 12, etc., steps S503, S504, The final stop symbol may be determined by executing the processes of steps S507, S512, and S513 shown in FIG. In addition, the display control CPU may determine the slip pattern, the pseudo continuous pattern, and the temporary stop symbol by executing the slip / pseudo continuous setting process of step S514, or the mode effect setting of step S516. By executing the processing, the presence / absence of the button effect and the effect mode may be determined. Further, the display control CPU may determine one of the effect control patterns as the usage pattern by executing the process of step S517. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Note that the audio control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S517 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 2, any one of the processes executed by the production control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 or the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In the above embodiment, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state is controlled. After the two round big hit state is finished, the positive change state is controlled. Explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the case where the big hit type is “accurate”, in addition to this case, the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly” A case of “normal” may be provided. In this case, in the jackpot type determination table 131, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type for the jackpot type of “sudden time reduction” or “sudden normal” according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. ) May be assigned.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the big hit type is “accuracy”, it is controlled to the short time state. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “suddenly normal”, the two round big hit state is controlled in the same way as when the big hit type is “surprise”, and the two round big hit state ends. After that, unlike the case where the jackpot type is “surprise”, the normal state is controlled. As a result, even if the player can recognize that the player will be in the 2-round jackpot state, the player's expectation for the gaming state controlled after the end of the two-round jackpot state can be enhanced, and the gaming interest can be improved. it can. Note that the two-round big hit state of “suddenly short time” or “suddenly normal” is also referred to as a predetermined gaming state.

  In this way, when a big hit type such as “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal” is provided, when the variable display result is “Big hit”, the big hit type becomes “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”. You may make it transfer to the above-mentioned common production mode (mode A, mode B, or mode C). When the variable display result is “big hit”, when the variable display result is “big hit” in the common performance mode, which is triggered by the fact that the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” A special effect may be executed in variable display.

  In this case, there is no need for “small hit” as the variable display result, and “small hit” in the above embodiment may be replaced with “suddenly short time” or “suddenly normal”. For example, in the process of step S748 in FIG. 55, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal”, and the display result is “big hit”. If the big hit type is “Suddenly short” or “Suddenly normal”, the suddenly short flag or suddenly normal flag is set to the on state. In step S782 in FIG. 56, it may be determined whether or not the sudden time reduction flag or the sudden normal flag is in an on state. In this case, the fact that the variable display result is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” may be specified by the display result of the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B. In this way, if the variable display result is “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” and the variable display result is “big hit”, a premium effect such as a special effect ( For example, an effect that cannot be seen unless a specific condition is satisfied) can be seen, so that the range of the effect is widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the “suddenly short” or “suddenly normal” jackpot type is provided, after the variable display result becomes “suddenly short” and then “surprise”, it is highly accurate after the end of the two-round jackpot state. On the other hand, after the variable display result becomes “suddenly normal” and then becomes “probable”, it may be controlled to the high probability low base state after the end of the two round big hit state. .

  In the above-described embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the variable display result being “big hit”, the high release base is controlled to increase the possibility of a game ball entering the second start winning opening. The state and the low base state where the advantageous opening control is not performed are included, but such an advantageous opening control may not be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, after the big hit gaming state when the big hit type is “probability change”, it is controlled to the high probability high base state, and after the big hit gaming state when the “big hit” is high, the high probability Although it was controlled to one of the low base state, depending on whether the big hit type is "probability change" or "surprise accuracy", after the big hit gaming state ends, the high accuracy high base state and the high probability low The ratio controlled to any of the base states may be different from each other.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 16 ... Display control board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Start port switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Operation button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121, 141 ... ROM
102, 122, 142 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124, 143... Random number circuits 105, 125, 144... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit 140 ... Display control CPU

Claims (2)

When each is a specific display result variable display displaying a result of the identification information of the hand stages having a variable display unit that derives displaying variable display was carried out display results predetermined identification information of a plurality of types can be identified A high probability that the specific display state is controlled after the specific gaming state is completed and the specific display result is ended after the specific gaming state is ended based on the fact that the special gaming state is controlled, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state,
A special variable winning device that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player;
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state that changes the special variable prize-winning device from the second state to the first state for a first period, and a second period that is shorter than the first period for the special variable prize-winning device. At least a second specific gaming state that changes from the second state to the first state,
When the display result of the identification information of the variable display means becomes a predetermined display result determined in advance, the special variable winning device is controlled to a small hit gaming state that changes in the same manner as the second specific gaming state. A small hit gaming state control means;
Whether to control the specific game state, have the or controlled to a specific game state, whether or not to establish a pre-SL special conditions, and the identification information whether to control the Koatari gaming state deviation A pre-determining means for determining before the display result of is derived and displayed,
Based on the determination by the pre-determining means, the probability state before controlling to the high probability state after the end of the second specific gaming state and before entering the small hit gaming state after the end of the small hit gaming state State control means for maintaining
Based on being controlled to the second specific gaming state or the small hit gaming state, control is made to a common performance mode in which a common performance can be executed regardless of whether the state is the high probability state or the normal probability state. And a common production mode control means for
Based on the fact that the common effect mode control means is controlled to the small hit game state, the common effect mode is controlled, and that the predetermining means controls to the specific game state in the common effect mode. Including a special effect execution means for executing a special effect when an execution condition established by making the decision is satisfied ,
The special effect execution means does not execute the special effect when the execution condition is not satisfied,
The variable display means includes
First variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of first identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area among the start areas, and for deriving and displaying a display result;
A second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting area of the starting area, and for deriving and displaying a display result;
When both the first variable display means and the second variable display means can execute variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means Priority control means for prioritizing execution of
Said predetermination means, wherein the first starting region that game media passes, or whether the second start region game media control to the specific game state based on the passed, have a deviation or controlled to the specific game state, whether or not to establish a pre-SL special conditions, is determined and the case where the first start region game media passes, when the second start region game media passes And determining which of the specific gaming states is to be controlled at a different rate. When each is a specific display result variable display displaying a result of the identification information of the hand stage having a variable display unit that derives displaying variable display was carried out display results predetermined identification information of a plurality of types can be identified A high probability that the specific display state is controlled after the specific gaming state is completed and the specific display result is ended after the specific gaming state is ended based on the fact that the special gaming state is controlled, which is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state,
A special variable winning device that changes between a first state that is advantageous to the player and a second state that is disadvantageous to the player;
The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state that changes the special variable prize-winning device from the second state to the first state for a first period, and a second period that is shorter than the first period for the special variable prize-winning device. A second specific gaming state that changes from the second state to the first state; and a third specific gaming state that changes the special variable prize-winning device from the second state to the first state for the second period. ,
Whether to control the specific game state, or controlled to the specific game state shifts have, determine whether or not to establish a及beauty before Symbol special conditions before the display result of the identification information is derived displayed Pre-determining means to
State control means for controlling to the high probability state after the second specific gaming state is finished based on the determination by the prior decision means, while controlling to the normal probability state after the third specific gaming state is finished. When,
Based on being controlled to the second specific game state or the third specific game state, the common effect mode is able to execute a common effect regardless of the high probability state or the normal probability state. A common production mode control means for controlling,
Based on the fact that the common effect mode control means is controlled to the third specific game state, the common effect mode is controlled, and the prior determination means controls to the specific game state in the common effect mode. Including a special effect execution means for executing a special effect when an execution condition established by the determination of
The special effect execution means does not execute the special effect when the execution condition is not satisfied,
The variable display means includes
First variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of first identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the first start area among the start areas, and for deriving and displaying a display result;
A second variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of second identification information, each of which can be identified based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the second starting area of the starting area, and for deriving and displaying a display result;
When both the first variable display means and the second variable display means can execute variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information, the variable display of the second identification information in the second variable display means Priority control means for prioritizing execution of
Said predetermination means, wherein the first starting region that game media passes, or whether the second start region game media control to the specific game state based on the passed, have a deviation or controlled to the specific game state, whether or not to establish a pre-SL special conditions, is determined and the case where the first start region game media passes, when the second start region game media passes And determining which of the specific gaming states is to be controlled at a different rate.